Hello community,
here is the log from the commit of package texlive-specs-i for openSUSE:Factory checked in at 2015-02-24 13:00:00
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Comparing /work/SRC/openSUSE:Factory/texlive-specs-i (Old)
and /work/SRC/openSUSE:Factory/.texlive-specs-i.new (New)
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Package is "texlive-specs-i"
Changes:
--------
--- /work/SRC/openSUSE:Factory/texlive-specs-i/texlive-specs-i.changes 2014-06-18 07:50:56.000000000 +0200
+++ /work/SRC/openSUSE:Factory/.texlive-specs-i.new/texlive-specs-i.changes 2015-02-24 13:02:04.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,0 +2,14 @@
+Thu Feb 19 09:29:36 UTC 2015 - coolo@suse.com
+
+- rework generate to create the texlive-specs-$letter.spec directly
+ to build X sources
+- this decouples the letter from being a prefix to be a slice of
+ all the texlive packages
+
+- as such patches move between packages, among them
+ bbold_bbold11.dif bbold_bbold11.dif context_fourier-map.dif context_fourier-map.dif
+ jadetex_ini.dif kpathsea_cnf.dif latexdiff_env.dif luaotfload_varfonts.dif latex2man_tmphandling.dif
+ musixtex_various.dif pgf_plain.dif musixtex_various.dif texconfig_scripts.dif
+ texdraw_info.dif tex4ht_env.dif texdoc_cnf.dif tetex_scripts.dif
+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------
Old:
----
ibycus-babel.doc.tar.xz
ibycus-babel.tar.xz
ibygrk.doc.tar.xz
ibygrk.tar.xz
icsv.doc.tar.xz
icsv.tar.xz
idxlayout.doc.tar.xz
idxlayout.tar.xz
ieeepes.doc.tar.xz
ieeepes.tar.xz
ifetex.doc.tar.xz
ifetex.tar.xz
ifluatex.doc.tar.xz
ifluatex.tar.xz
ifmslide.doc.tar.xz
ifmslide.tar.xz
ifmtarg.doc.tar.xz
ifmtarg.tar.xz
ifnextok.doc.tar.xz
ifnextok.tar.xz
ifoddpage.doc.tar.xz
ifoddpage.tar.xz
ifplatform.doc.tar.xz
ifplatform.tar.xz
ifsym.doc.tar.xz
ifsym.tar.xz
iftex.doc.tar.xz
iftex.tar.xz
ifthenx.doc.tar.xz
ifthenx.tar.xz
ifxetex.doc.tar.xz
ifxetex.tar.xz
iitem.doc.tar.xz
iitem.tar.xz
ijmart.doc.tar.xz
ijmart.tar.xz
ijqc.doc.tar.xz
ijqc.tar.xz
imac.doc.tar.xz
imac.tar.xz
image-gallery.doc.tar.xz
image-gallery.tar.xz
imakeidx.doc.tar.xz
imakeidx.tar.xz
impatient-fr.doc.tar.xz
impatient-fr.tar.xz
impatient.doc.tar.xz
impatient.tar.xz
impnattypo.doc.tar.xz
impnattypo.tar.xz
import.doc.tar.xz
import.tar.xz
imsproc.doc.tar.xz
imsproc.tar.xz
imtekda.doc.tar.xz
imtekda.tar.xz
incgraph.doc.tar.xz
incgraph.tar.xz
inconsolata.doc.tar.xz
inconsolata.tar.xz
index.doc.tar.xz
index.tar.xz
initials.doc.tar.xz
initials.tar.xz
inlinebib.doc.tar.xz
inlinebib.tar.xz
inlinedef.doc.tar.xz
inlinedef.tar.xz
inputtrc.doc.tar.xz
inputtrc.tar.xz
insbox.doc.tar.xz
insbox.tar.xz
interactiveworkbook.doc.tar.xz
interactiveworkbook.tar.xz
interfaces.doc.tar.xz
interfaces.tar.xz
interpreter.doc.tar.xz
interpreter.tar.xz
interval.doc.tar.xz
interval.tar.xz
intro-scientific.doc.tar.xz
intro-scientific.tar.xz
inversepath.doc.tar.xz
inversepath.tar.xz
invoice.doc.tar.xz
invoice.tar.xz
ionumbers.doc.tar.xz
ionumbers.tar.xz
iopart-num.doc.tar.xz
iopart-num.tar.xz
ipaex-type1.doc.tar.xz
ipaex-type1.tar.xz
ipaex.doc.tar.xz
ipaex.tar.xz
iso.doc.tar.xz
iso.tar.xz
iso10303.doc.tar.xz
iso10303.tar.xz
isodate.doc.tar.xz
isodate.tar.xz
isodoc.doc.tar.xz
isodoc.tar.xz
isomath.doc.tar.xz
isomath.tar.xz
isonums.doc.tar.xz
isonums.tar.xz
isorot.doc.tar.xz
isorot.tar.xz
isotope.doc.tar.xz
isotope.tar.xz
issuulinks.doc.tar.xz
issuulinks.tar.xz
itnumpar.doc.tar.xz
itnumpar.tar.xz
iwhdp.doc.tar.xz
iwhdp.tar.xz
iwona.doc.tar.xz
iwona.tar.xz
texlive-specs-rpmlintrc
texlive-specs.tar.xz
New:
----
fbs.tar.xz
fc.doc.tar.xz
fc.tar.xz
fcltxdoc.doc.tar.xz
fcltxdoc.tar.xz
fdsymbol.doc.tar.xz
fdsymbol.tar.xz
featpost.doc.tar.xz
featpost.tar.xz
fenixpar.doc.tar.xz
fenixpar.tar.xz
feyn.doc.tar.xz
feyn.tar.xz
feynmf.doc.tar.xz
feynmf.tar.xz
feynmp-auto.doc.tar.xz
feynmp-auto.tar.xz
fge.doc.tar.xz
fge.tar.xz
fifinddo-info.doc.tar.xz
fifinddo-info.source.tar.xz
fig4latex.doc.tar.xz
fig4latex.tar.xz
figbas.doc.tar.xz
figbas.tar.xz
figbib.doc.tar.xz
figbib.tar.xz
figflow.doc.tar.xz
figflow.tar.xz
figsize.doc.tar.xz
figsize.tar.xz
filecontents.doc.tar.xz
filecontents.tar.xz
filedate.doc.tar.xz
filedate.tar.xz
filehook.doc.tar.xz
filehook.tar.xz
fileinfo.doc.tar.xz
fileinfo.tar.xz
filemod.doc.tar.xz
filemod.tar.xz
finbib.tar.xz
findhyph.doc.tar.xz
findhyph.tar.xz
fink.doc.tar.xz
fink.tar.xz
finstrut.doc.tar.xz
finstrut.tar.xz
first-latex-doc.doc.tar.xz
fix2col.doc.tar.xz
fix2col.tar.xz
fixfoot.doc.tar.xz
fixfoot.tar.xz
fixlatvian.doc.tar.xz
fixlatvian.tar.xz
fixltxhyph.doc.tar.xz
fixltxhyph.tar.xz
fixme.doc.tar.xz
fixme.tar.xz
fixmetodonotes.doc.tar.xz
fixmetodonotes.tar.xz
fixpdfmag.tar.xz
fjodor.doc.tar.xz
fjodor.tar.xz
flabels.doc.tar.xz
flabels.tar.xz
flacards.doc.tar.xz
flacards.tar.xz
flagderiv.doc.tar.xz
flagderiv.tar.xz
flashcards.doc.tar.xz
flashcards.tar.xz
flashmovie.doc.tar.xz
flashmovie.tar.xz
flipbook.doc.tar.xz
flipbook.tar.xz
flippdf.doc.tar.xz
flippdf.tar.xz
float.doc.tar.xz
float.tar.xz
floatrow.doc.tar.xz
floatrow.tar.xz
flowchart.doc.tar.xz
flowchart.tar.xz
flowfram.doc.tar.xz
flowfram.tar.xz
fltpoint.doc.tar.xz
fltpoint.tar.xz
fmp.doc.tar.xz
fmp.tar.xz
fmtcount.doc.tar.xz
fmtcount.tar.xz
fn2end.doc.tar.xz
fn2end.tar.xz
fnbreak.doc.tar.xz
fnbreak.tar.xz
fncychap.doc.tar.xz
fncychap.tar.xz
fncylab.doc.tar.xz
fncylab.tar.xz
fnpara.doc.tar.xz
fnpara.tar.xz
fnpct.doc.tar.xz
fnpct.tar.xz
fntproof.doc.tar.xz
fntproof.tar.xz
fnumprint.doc.tar.xz
fnumprint.tar.xz
foekfont.doc.tar.xz
foekfont.tar.xz
foilhtml.doc.tar.xz
foilhtml.tar.xz
fonetika.doc.tar.xz
fonetika.tar.xz
font-change.doc.tar.xz
font-change.tar.xz
fontawesome.doc.tar.xz
fontawesome.tar.xz
fontaxes.doc.tar.xz
fontaxes.tar.xz
fontbook.doc.tar.xz
fontbook.tar.xz
fontch.doc.tar.xz
fontch.tar.xz
fontinst.doc.tar.xz
fontinst.tar.xz
fontname.doc.tar.xz
fontname.tar.xz
fontools.doc.tar.xz
fontools.tar.xz
fonts-tlwg.doc.tar.xz
fonts-tlwg.tar.xz
fontspec.doc.tar.xz
fontspec.tar.xz
fonttable.doc.tar.xz
fonttable.tar.xz
fontware.doc.tar.xz
fontwrap.doc.tar.xz
fontwrap.tar.xz
footbib.doc.tar.xz
footbib.tar.xz
footmisc.doc.tar.xz
footmisc.tar.xz
footnotebackref.doc.tar.xz
footnotebackref.tar.xz
footnoterange.doc.tar.xz
footnoterange.tar.xz
footnpag.doc.tar.xz
footnpag.tar.xz
forarray.doc.tar.xz
forarray.tar.xz
foreign.doc.tar.xz
foreign.tar.xz
forest.doc.tar.xz
forest.tar.xz
forloop.doc.tar.xz
forloop.tar.xz
formlett.doc.tar.xz
formlett.tar.xz
formular.doc.tar.xz
formular.tar.xz
fouridx.doc.tar.xz
fouridx.tar.xz
fourier.doc.tar.xz
fourier.tar.xz
fouriernc.doc.tar.xz
fouriernc.tar.xz
fp.doc.tar.xz
fp.tar.xz
fpl.doc.tar.xz
fpl.tar.xz
fragmaster.doc.tar.xz
fragmaster.tar.xz
fragments.doc.tar.xz
fragments.tar.xz
frame.doc.tar.xz
frame.tar.xz
framed.doc.tar.xz
framed.tar.xz
francais-bst.doc.tar.xz
francais-bst.tar.xz
frankenstein.doc.tar.xz
frankenstein.tar.xz
frcursive.doc.tar.xz
frcursive.tar.xz
frege.doc.tar.xz
frege.tar.xz
frenchle.doc.tar.xz
frenchle.tar.xz
frletter.doc.tar.xz
frletter.tar.xz
frontespizio.doc.tar.xz
frontespizio.tar.xz
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Other differences:
------------------
++++++ texlive-specs-i.spec ++++++
++++ 12147 lines (skipped)
++++ between /work/SRC/openSUSE:Factory/texlive-specs-i/texlive-specs-i.spec
++++ and /work/SRC/openSUSE:Factory/.texlive-specs-i.new/texlive-specs-i.spec
++++++ ieeepes.tar.xz -> fbs.tar.xz ++++++
++++ 2949 lines of diff (skipped)
++++++ ibycus-babel.doc.tar.xz -> fc.doc.tar.xz ++++++
++++ 2553 lines of diff (skipped)
++++++ ibycus-babel.doc.tar.xz -> fc.tar.xz ++++++
++++ 16618 lines of diff (skipped)
++++++ ibygrk.doc.tar.xz -> fge.doc.tar.xz ++++++
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/fge/README new/doc/fonts/fge/README
--- old/doc/fonts/fge/README 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/fonts/fge/README 2011-12-03 17:26:54.000000000 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+This is the fge font, a font of special symbols for setting Frege's
+Grundgesetze der Arithmetik and the secondary literature.
+
+See the file fge-doc.pdf for information on how to access to these
+symbols from LaTeX.
+
+The original font is written in Metafont and mftrace is used to
+create PostScript Type 1 (pfb) files.
+
+This package contains several characters derived largely from
+the Computer Modern fonts, (c) D.E. Knuth. The spritus lenis
+accent is a simplified version of that in the Ibycus font
+(c) Pierre A. MacKay. The remainder of this work is Copyright
+(c) J.J. Green 2007, 2009, 2011 and subject to the LaTeX Project
+Public License.
+
+Further information on the font can be found at
+
+ http://soliton.vm.bytemark.co.uk/pub/jjg/en/code/fge.html
+
+J.J. Green 2011
Files old/doc/fonts/fge/fge-doc.pdf and new/doc/fonts/fge/fge-doc.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/COPYING new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/COPYING
--- old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/COPYING 2008-02-05 20:05:39.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/COPYING 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,340 +0,0 @@
- GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
- Version 2, June 1991
-
- Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
- 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
- Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
- of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
-
- Preamble
-
- The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
-freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
-License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
-software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
-General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
-Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
-using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
-the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
-your programs, too.
-
- When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
-price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
-have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
-this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
-if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
-in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
-
- To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
-anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
-These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
-distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
-
- For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
-gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
-you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
-source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
-rights.
-
- We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
-(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
-distribute and/or modify the software.
-
- Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
-that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
-software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
-want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
-that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
-authors' reputations.
-
- Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
-patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
-program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
-program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
-patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
-
- The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
-modification follow.
-
- GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
- TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
-
- 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
-a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
-under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
-refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
-means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
-that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
-either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
-language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
-the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
-
-Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
-covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
-running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
-is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
-Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
-Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
-
- 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
-source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
-conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
-copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
-notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
-and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
-along with the Program.
-
-You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
-you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
-
- 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
-of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
-distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
-above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
-
- a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
- stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
-
- b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
- whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
- part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
- parties under the terms of this License.
-
- c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
- when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
- interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
- announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
- notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
- a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
- these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
- License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
- does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
- the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
-
-These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
-identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
-and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
-themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
-sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
-distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
-on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
-this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
-entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
-
-Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
-your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
-exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
-collective works based on the Program.
-
-In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
-with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
-a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
-the scope of this License.
-
- 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
-under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
-Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
-
- a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
- source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
- 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
-
- b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
- years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
- cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
- machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
- distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
- customarily used for software interchange; or,
-
- c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
- to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
- allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
- received the program in object code or executable form with such
- an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
-
-The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
-making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
-code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
-associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
-control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
-special exception, the source code distributed need not include
-anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
-form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
-operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
-itself accompanies the executable.
-
-If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
-access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
-access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
-distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
-compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
-
- 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
-except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
-otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
-void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
-However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
-this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
-parties remain in full compliance.
-
- 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
-signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
-distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
-prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
-modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
-Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
-all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
-the Program or works based on it.
-
- 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
-Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
-original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
-these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
-restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
-You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
-this License.
-
- 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
-infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
-conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
-otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
-excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
-distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
-License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
-may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
-license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
-all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
-the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
-refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
-
-If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
-any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
-apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
-circumstances.
-
-It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
-patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
-such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
-integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
-implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
-generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
-through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
-system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
-to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
-impose that choice.
-
-This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
-be a consequence of the rest of this License.
-
- 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
-certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
-original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
-may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
-those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
-countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
-the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
-
- 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
-of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
-be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
-address new problems or concerns.
-
-Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
-specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
-later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
-either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
-Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
-this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
-Foundation.
-
- 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
-programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
-to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
-Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
-make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
-of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
-of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
-
- NO WARRANTY
-
- 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
-FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
-OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
-PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
-OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
-MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
-TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
-PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
-REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
-
- 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
-WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
-REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
-INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
-OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
-TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
-YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
-PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
-POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
-
- END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
-
- How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
-
- If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
-possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
-free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
-
- To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
-to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
-convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
-the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
-
-
- Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
-
- This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
- it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
- the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
- (at your option) any later version.
-
- This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
- but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
- MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
- GNU General Public License for more details.
-
- You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
- along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
- Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
-
-
-Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
-
-If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
-when it starts in an interactive mode:
-
- Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
- Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
- This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
- under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
-
-The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
-parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may
-be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
-mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
-
-You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
-school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
-necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
-
- Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
- `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
-
- <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
- Ty Coon, President of Vice
-
-This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
-proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
-consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
-library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
-Public License instead of this License.
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/NEWS new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/NEWS
--- old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/NEWS 2008-02-05 20:05:39.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/NEWS 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-============================================================
- Ibycus4 -- News
-============================================================
-
-2004-10-27, version 4.5
-
- Changed directory structure to comply with TDS 1.1.
-
- The bold Ibycus font, too, is now available in Postscript
- format. It was converted from Metafont to Type1 by Harald
- Harders , and is available as
- fibb84.pfb + fibb84.afm. A record for this font has been
- added to the map file iby.map.
-
- Font file IbycusHTG-Regular.pfb renamed to fibr84.pfb, to
- comply with Karl-Berry-scheme; map file changed
- accordingly. The font should now work flawlessly with
- Acrobat Reader 5; special thanks to Peter Heslin and Ralf
- Stubner, who succeeded to find and fix a long-standing
- bug.
-
- Fixed definition of the macro \greek, so as to work
- also with default font encodings other than OT1.
-
- New text-generating command \textgreek as a counterpart to
- the declaration \greek.
-
- Changed font definition file Uibycus.fd:
- * only those fonts are used, that exist actually as Type1;
- * fonts are declared as scalable;
- * font definitions now work with VTeX, too.
-
- Regular Ibycus font is used as a 1:1 substitute for the
- MF font now, without going via a virtual font.
- Virtual fonts and related font metrics are gone.
-
- Proper identification messages (\ProvidesPackage) in all
- LaTeX macro files
-
- Patched pssetiby.tex so that only Type1 fonts are used,
- and that it works with VTeX.
-
--- finis
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/README new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/README
--- old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/README 2008-02-05 20:05:39.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/README 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
-============================================================
- Ibycus4, version 4.5 as of 2004-10-27
-============================================================
- Pierre MacKay <mackay at cs.washington.edu>
- Walter Schmidt <w-a-schmidt at gmx.net>
-
-
-Overview
---------
-Ibycus4 is a Greek typeface, based on Silvio Levy's
-realization of a classic Didot cut of Greek type from around
-1800. It is accompanied by a set of macro packages to use
-it with Plain TeX or LaTeX 2e.
-
-See the file NEWS for a summary of the latest changes.
-
-
-Installing
-----------
-The below installation instructions assume a TDS-compliant
-TeX system, in particular teTeX or MikTeX. The directory
-name "texmf" refers to the root directory of a TDS directory
-tree. In case your TeX systems has more than one directory
-tree, its documentation should tell you where to install new
-files.
-
-In case you have installed a previous release of the Ibycus4
-system, delete
-
-* the directory
- texmf/fonts/vf/public/ibycus/
-
-* the file
- texmf/dvips/iby.map
-
-* and the files
- texmf/fonts/tfm/public/ibycus4/fibo.pl
- texmf/fonts/tfm/public/ibycus4/fibo.tfm
- texmf/fonts/tfm/public/ibycus4/fibr.pl
- texmf/fonts/tfm/public/ibycus4/fibr.tfm
- texmf/fonts/type1/public/ibycushtg-regular.pfb (or .pfa)
-
-before installing the new release.
-
-To install Ibycus 4, v4.5,
-
- * Copy the everything from the directories doc, fonts and
- tex of the distribution to the corresponding directories
- texmf/doc, texmf/fonts and texmf/tex of your TeX system.
-
- * Update the file name data base of your TeX system (if
- applicable),
-
- * Add the information from the font mapping file
- texmf/fonts/map/dvips/ibycus4/iby.map to the configuration
- of dvips, pdfTeX and related programs.
- See the documentation of your TeX system for the details.
- In particular, your TeX system may expect map files in a
- different directory such as texmf/dvips/config; move
- iby.map to that directory, if necessary.
- Make sure that there is no further file named "iby.map"
- from a previous Ibycus version around!
-
-Finally read the text file README, which should have been
-installed in the directory texmf/doc/generic/ibycus4/ of the
-TDS directory tree. It describes the usage of the Ibycus4
-system.
-
-
-License
--------
-
- Copyright (c) 1992--2004 Pierre A. MacKay
-
-See the file COPYING (GNU General Public License) for
-license conditions. As a special exception, permission is
-granted to include the font programs fibr84.pfb and
-fibb84.pfb in a Postscript or PDF document that contains
-text to be displayed or printed using these fonts,
-regardless of the conditions or license applying to the
-document itself.
-
-== finis
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/README.ibycus4 new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/README.ibycus4
--- old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/README.ibycus4 2008-02-05 20:05:39.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/README.ibycus4 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,361 +0,0 @@
-======================================================================
- Ibycus4, version 4.5 as of 2004-10-27
-======================================================================
- Pierre A. MacKay
- Department of Classics
- University of Washington
- mackay@cs.washington.edu
-
- Walter Schmidt
- w-a-schmidt@gmx.net
-
-
-Overview
----------
-
-Like its predecessors, Ibycus4 is based on Silvio Levy's
-realization of a classic Didot cut of Greek type from around 1800.
-Ibycus4 is as close as possible to Ibycus3 in all possible
-respects, but there are some improved set widths and pair-kernings
-which might clobber old carefully adjusted text spacings
-such as Alexandrian shaped poetry.
-
-
-Plain TeX usage
----------------
-
- \input ibycus4 % to use MF fonts, at fixed sizes
-or
- \input ibycusps % to use scalable Type1 fonts
-
-then
- \setgreek10/12 (or other reasonable combination
- of pointsize and leading)
-then
- Latin text \GK{}a)rxai=a gra'mmata\RM{} Latin again.
-
-NOTE that the ) is a smooth breathing, not a parenthesis.
-
-
-
-LaTeX2e usage
-------------
-
- \usepackage{ibycus4} % to use MF fonts, at fixed sizes
-or
- \usepackage{psibycus} % to use scalable Type1 fonts
-then
- Latin text {\greek{}a)rxai=a gra'mmata} Latin again.
-
-Note the outer braces to keep the font change local.
-Alternatively, use the text-generating command \textgreek,
-which was introduced with version 4.5:
-
- Latin text \textgreek{a)rxai=a gra'mmata} Latin again.
-
-Greek text will honor size-changing commands as well as
-switching to the bold font series (\bfseries, \textbf}.
-
-
-
-LaTeX2e usage with Babel
-------------------------
-Alternatively, the Ibycus fonts can be used in LaTeX via the
-Babel system. Beside the Babel core, which is part of any
-LaTeX system, this requires the macros of the "Ibycus-Babel"
-iterface; see
-
- CTAN:fonts/greek/package-babel/ibycus-babel/.
-
-In contrast to the macros distributed with the fonts, this
-newer approach supports proper hypehantion in Greek text
-passages.
-
-
-
-The TeX macro files and the input conventions
----------------------------------------------
-
-$TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus4/ibycus4.tex
-
- The main package file for plain TeX
-
-$TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus4/ibycusps.tex
-
- Ditto, using tne Type1 fonts
-
-$TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus4/ibycus4.sty
-
- The main package file for LaTeX 2e
-
-$TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus4/psibycus.sty
-
- Ditto, using the Type1 fonts
-
-$TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus4/setiby4.tex
-
- Included by ibygrk.tex unless newnep format is running
-
-$TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus4/pssetiby.tex
-
- ditto, using the Type1 fonts
-
-$TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus4/tlgsqq.tex
-
- The name suggests the association with coding of the
- Thesaurus Linguae Graecae.
-
- This file provides uniquely named macros for all combinations
- of letter and accent, so that any invocation of the macro will
- produce a sequence of characters corresponding with the
- entries put into the TFM ligature table. These sequences may
- always be used to generate accented characters. They are
- based, with some slight modifications where David Packard's Ibycus
- input coding seems too misleading, on the Ibycus adaptation of
- TLG beta-code.
-
- For input coding, the parentheses, ) and ( are used for
- breathings, ' (ASCII char '047--acute or single quote) and `
- (ASCII char '140--grave) are used for oxytone and barytone (to
- avoid preemption of the usual TeX excape character) and =
- (ASCII char '075) is used for perispomenon to avoid preemption
- of the active tie character in plain.tex. + is used for
- dieresis after u or i and for some other special characters.
- | is used for iota subscript and ! (ASCII char '041--\bang) is
- used to call out the "dot-under" convention for partially
- preserved letters in manuscript or epigraphical texts. Order
- is significant. Breathings or diereses come first, after the
- affected letter, then accents, then iota subscript or \bang.
- These codings represent the input coding convention, not the
- mapping in the font itself.
-
- The digraphs, trigraphs etc. can be read from tlgsqq.tex
- Postpositives fall into three order-dependent and
- exclusive classes--only one from each class may be used
- in any single accented cluster.
-
- 1 2 3
- nil nil nil
- ( [asper] ' [oxytone] | [iota subscript]
- ) [lenis] ` [barytone] ! [dot below letter]
- + [other] = [perispomene]
-
- Some special digraphs are K+ Koppa, k+ koppa, C+ lunate Cigma,
- c+ lunate cigma, s+ sampi (lowercase late form only) and s| which
- forces a medial sigma.
- << and >> give guillemets (not guillemots as Adobe
- ornithologically supposes) and (( )) give single parentheses
- though care must be taken that the first ( or ) is not
- interpreted as a breathing. {((} and {))} are safe.
-
- %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
- NOTE: THE FOLLOWING CODINGS ARE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH IBYCUS3
- %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
- I have tried to keep incompatible codings to the minimum
- but the ibycus3 versions of the following were extremely
- undesirable. These are all simplifications of ibycus3 coding.
- %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
- The mark of elision is ' or {'} (the form in braces may be
- needed to prevent ' from being read as an accent).
- Single quotes may be provided by ` {`} and ' {'}, (isolate them
- in braces if necessary). Double quotes are `` {``} and
- '' {''} (isolate in braces if necessary). < and > are the
- angle brackets used for conjectural supplements.
- %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-ibycus4.map
-
- This is {\em exactly} the same file as is used by METAFONT.
- It is so structured that it can be read by either
- TeX or Metafont. The mapping is very close to that of GreekKeys,
- which is distributed for the Macintosh by the American
- Philological Association. Other mappings can be created
- in the same manner.
-
-$TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus4/Uibycus4.fd
-
- Font definition file for LaTeX2e.
-
-$TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus4/Uibycus.fd
-
- Ditto, using only those fonts that exist in type1 format
-
-$TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus4/iby4extr.tex
-
- Access to some editorial symbols for classical editions.
-
-
-
-Example documents
-----------------..
-
-$TEXMF/doc/generic/ibycus4/ibycus4.ltx (for LaTeX 2e)
-$TEXMF/doc/generic/ibycus4/psibycus.ltx (for LaTeX 2e)
-$TEXMF/doc/generic/ibycus4/iby4text.tex (for Plain TeX)
-$TEXMF/doc/generic/ibycus4/psibycus.tex (for Plain TeX)
-
- The exquisite little poem by Ibycus of Rhegium, until recently
- almost the only thing known by him. (The Ibycus system
- developed by David Packard is only indirectly named after
- the poet. The direct inspiration was Packard's cat.)
-
-Note that the LaTeX2e exampls use the "traditional" Ibycus
-macros, rather than the newer Ibycus-Babel interface.
-
-
-
-The METAFONT files
-------------------
-
-The METAFONT part of the package consists of a set of files which use
-the original characters of Silvio Levy's greek fonts and combine them
-in ways which reflect the increased capabilities of TeX and METAFONT
-developed since Levy did the original greek for TeX. The Levy source
-files can be got from one of the CTAN archives and placed in
-$TEXMF/fonts/source/public/levy
- where they will automatically become
-accessible if you are using a TeX Directory Structure [TDS] layout of
-files. If you are not using a file searching system like Karl Berry's
-"kpathsea", see $TEXMF/fonts/source/public/ibycus4/ibycus4.mf for
-hints on making the Levy source available. For directions on the
-use and management of Karl Berry's path searching, consult "The TeX
-Live Guide, version 2" by Sebastian Rahtz and Michael Goosens, in
-{\it TUGboat}. Volume 18 (1997). Pages 81-112, especially pp. 87--9.
-Web2c TeX for Unix systems, Thomas Esser's teTeX, and the Solaris package
-referenced at http://smc.vnet.net/solaris_2.5.html all use Karl
-Berry's path searching.
-
-Ibycus4 METAFONT files are in $TEXMF/fonts/source/public/ibycus4
-
-The most significant changes are:
-
- 1. The large repertory of initial/medial sigma + letter pairs
- is suppressed from the new fonts, and the new enhanced TFM
- ligature scheme is used instead to provide for the automatic
- differentiation between medial and final sigma.
-
- 2. The cells thus opened up in the font mapping are used for
- a variety of additional characters:
-
- a. A full repertory of vowels with breathings and
- barytone accents (many of these were absent from the
- original). The various forms of long epsilon and
- omicron with perispomene accent needed for early Attic
- and similar local scripts are provided.
-
- b. Lunate sigma, digamma, koppa and sampi are
- provided (the last in its lowercase late form
- only, since earlier forms are rather problematic
- and are virtually unused even in epigraphical texts).
-
- c. A simple iota subscript in a 0.5em character space
- is provided at position '174 for use in unusual
- groupings. For all normal usages three additional
- occurences of the glyph are kerned (in the traditional
- sense) far to the left so that they will fit under
- alpha, eta and omega respectively. These characters
- are called out automatically through the TeX TFM
- ligature system, for which see below. The glyph under
- eta is shortened slightly to give better clearance
- under the left stem of lowercase eta. The iota
- subscript glyph retains its simple form in 300dpi
- renditions, and in any bitmap which drops below
- 500dpi, but it thins out and develops a slight
- rightward hook at 600dpi and above.
-
- d. The mechanism of drastic left kerning is also used
- to set dots under letters which cannot be read
- completely from the manuscript or stone. These dota
- are likewise called out automatically through the TFM
- ligature system. A final ! {\bang} after any letter
- or letter with postpositive accents (except those
- with iota subscripts) will produce the dotted form.
-
- e. Angle brackets, half brackets, double quotes, braces,
- a dagger and a doubledagger are now provided (see
- iby4extr.tex).
-
- 3. All characters have been named. The constructs
- ASCII"A" and oct"000" appear only at lower levels
- of programming.
-
- 4. Character spacing has been adjusted through kerning tables,
- particularly around lowercase iota (file ibylig4.mf).
- There is better separation between breathings and accents
- (this has required a redesign of almost all accents) and
- clearance between accent and base letter has been increased.
- The perispomene has been restored to its traditional form with
- a thick center and tapered ends, and the breathings have been
- given shorter, tapered tails. The deep ink trap between the
- bulb and tail of the breathings has been eliminated. Accents
- over epsilon have been raised and slightly shortened to give
- better clearance. The accents with diaeresis have been shifted
- up and laterally to clear the dot they lean toward.
-
- 5. Font mapping is specified independently of other
- parameters, in a distinct and separate file (file ibycus4.map).
- In some cases it may be more effective to remap the font
- than to struggle with TeX remapping.
-
- 6. A programming error which produced the wrong displacement
- value with free-standing accents has been corrected. Accents
- before uppercase vowels are kerned (in the traditional sense)
- out left to a negative left side bearing of about one unit
- (1/18em) unit so that their escapement does not leave
- excessive space after the preceding word or at the start of a
- line. They have also been properly pair-kerned with the
- uppercase vowels.
-
-A new naming convention uses "ibycus4" wherever possible, and
-the shorter string "iby4" where that would lead to ambiguity.
-some of the individual METAFONT character files are simply
-taged with the number 4. 8+3 filename compatibility is preserved.
-(under protest and with difficulty).
-
-The names of PK and TFM files follow Karl Berry's font name convention
-( 84 is the encoding for Ibycus 4).
-
-Foundry Facename Weights Variants Encoding_Variants DesignSize
-
-f ib [r], b r, o 84 [10], 9, 8
-
-fibr84 fibo84 fibb84
-
- with METAFONT design-size additions
-fibr848 fibo848 fibb848
-fibr849 fibo849 fibb849
-
-Driver files for the Bold Oblique variant can be provided but their use
-is discouraged. These Didot-derived characters do not stand up well
-to either boldfacing or obliqueing, and the combination is quite
-unfortunate. The typewriter style originally offered with these
-designs is quietly forgotten, although the code for it is still
-embedded in Silvio Levy's source.
-
-
-Type1 font files
-----------------
-
-Type1 font files reside in $TEXMF/fonts/type1/public/ibycus4:
-
-fibr84.pfb (corresponds to the MF font fibr84)
-fibb84.pfb (corresponds to the MF font fibb84)
-
-There are no Type1 renditions of the 8pt and 9pt fonts yet.
-
-
-License
--------
-
- Copyright (c) 1992--2004 Pierre A. MacKay
-
-See the file COPYING (GNU General Public License) for
-license conditions. As a special exception, permission is
-granted to include the font programs fibr84.pfb and
-fibb84.pfb in a Postscript or PDF document that contains
-text to be displayed or printed using these fonts,
-regardless of the conditions or license applying to the
-document itself.
-
-
-== finis
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/iby4text.tex new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/iby4text.tex
--- old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/iby4text.tex 2008-02-05 20:05:39.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/iby4text.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-% iby4text.tex-- P.A. MacKay -- July 16, 1997
-% Pierre A. MacKay, Dept. of Classics, University of Washington
-% mackay@cs.washington.edu
-% ------------------------
-% An example of ibycus4 using plain TeX
-%
-% Text from D. L. Page, {\it Greek Melic Poets}, (Oxford, 1962), p. 148
-% accepting the emendations of Mehlhorn and Hermann.
-%
-\hsize 4in
-\input ibycus4
-\setgreek11/14
-\let\!=\dagger
-
-\GK
-
-\centerline{IBUKOU TOU RHGINOU}
-
-\bigskip
-
-\leavevmode\llap{)=}Hri me`n ai(' te Kudw'niai
-
-mhli'des a)rdo'menai r(oa=n
-
-e)k pota'mwn i('na Parqe'nwn
-
-kh=pos a)kh'ratos, ai(' t' oi)nanqi'des
-
-au)co'menai skie'roisin u(f' e('rnesin
-
-oi)nare'ois qale'qoisin; e)moi` d' e)'ros
-
-ou)demi'an kata'koitos w('ran.
-
-q' u(po` steropa=s fle'gwn
-
-Qrhi+'kios Bore'as a)i's|-
-
-\quad swn para` Ku'pridos a)zale'ais mani'aisin e)remno`s a)qambh`s
-
-e)gkrate'ws pedo'qen \!fla'sen\!
-
-h(mete'ras fre'nas.
-
-\RM
-
-\end
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/ibycus3.RME new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/ibycus3.RME
--- old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/ibycus3.RME 2008-02-05 20:05:39.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/ibycus3.RME 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,231 +0,0 @@
-[This is ./doc/fonts/ibycus3/tex/README
- May 1992, revised Apr. 1994, revised for LaTeX2e Sep-Oct. 1995
- Final notes on Ibycus 3, May 30, 1966 ]
-
- ( THIS IS A TDS-CONFORMANT PACKAGE )
-
-BE SURE THAT ibycus3.map HAS BEEN COPIED AS DESCRIBED BELOW
-
-A sample input file is provided in iby3text.tex or ibycus3.ltx
-
-PLAIN TeX USAGE: \input iby3text
-
- then: \setgreek10/12 (or other reasonable combination
- of pointsize and leading)
-
- then: Latin text \GK{}a)rxai=a gra'mmata\RM{} Latin again.
-
- NOTE that the ) is a smooth breathing, not a parenthesis.
-
-LaTeX2e USAGE: \usepackage{ibycus3}
-
- then: Latin text {\greek{a)rxai=a gra'mmata}} Latin again.
- (Note the double braces, there is a font change here.)
-
- change font size with the \fontsize macro, thus:
-
- \fontsize{14}{17pt}\selectfont
-
-
-The TeX files in $TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus3 together with the
-METAFONT files in $TEXMF/fonts/source/public/ibycus3
-{\em especially ibycus3.map} are intended to provide a
-reasonable degree of compatibility between David Packard Jr.'s
-Ibycus/TLG system, and the TeX and METAFONT environment. These TeX
-files may have to be moved to an appropriate branch directory of
-$TEXMF/tex/ if you are not using Karl Berry's path-searching
-or its equivalent.
-
-The package consists of a set of METAFONT files which use the original
-characters of Silvio Levy's greek fonts (these can be got from
-one of the CTAN archives and placed in $TEXMF/fonts/source/public/levy
-if you are using a TeX Directory Structure [TDS] layout of files)
-and combine them in ways which reflect the increased capabilities of TeX
-and METAFONT developed since Levy did the original greek for TeX.
-If you are not using a file searching system like Karl Berry's
-"kpathsea", see $TEXMF/fonts/source/public/ibycus3/ibycus3.mf for
-hints on making the levy source available
-
-Ibycus3 METAFONT files are in $TEXMF/fonts/source/public/ibycus3
-
-The most significant changes are:
-
- 1. The large repertory of initial/medial sigma + letter pairs
- is suppressed from the new fonts, and the new enhanced TFM
- ligature scheme is used instead to provide for the automatic
- differentiation between medial and final sigma.
-
- 2. The cells thus opened up in the font mapping are used for
- a variety of additional characters:
-
- a. A full repertory of vowels with breathings and
- barytone accents (absent from the original).
-
- b. Digamma, koppa and sampi (the last in lowercase
- late form only, since earlier forms are rather
- problematic and are virtually unused even in
- epigraphical texts).
- NOTE: there is still room for things like acrophonic
- numerals, and perhaps the two markers used to
- distinguish numeric from alphabetic use of the letters
- ought to be provided. Another possibility is
- special symbols for text-edition, such as double
- brackets. (Editor supplements can be done
- using the characters defined in iby3extr.tex).
-
- Iota subscript retains its simple form in 300dpi
- renditions, and in any bitmap which drops below
- 500dpi, but it thins out and develops a slight
- rightward hook at 600dpi and above.
-
- 3. All characters have been named. The constructs
- ASCII"A" and oct"000" appear only at lower levels
- of programming.
-
- 4. Character spacing has been adjusted through kerning tables,
- particularly around lowercase iota (file ibylig.mf).
- There is more that could and should be done.
- Maybe it will yet happen.
-
- 5. Font mapping is specified independently of other
- parameters, in a distinct and separate file (file ibycus3.map).
- In some cases it may be more effective to remap the font
- than to struggle with TeX remapping.
-
- 6. Accents have been redesigned in several cases, usually
- in an attempt to reduce crowding among the elements of
- accent clusters. The accents with diaeresis have been shifted
- to clear the dot they lean toward. A programming error which
- produced the wrong displacement value with free-standing accents
- has been corrected. Accents before uppercase vowels are
- pair-kerned with the vowels. Angle brackets, half brackets,
- double quotes, braces and a dagger are now provided (see
- ibyextra.tex).
-
-The associated TeX files are:
-
- 1. $TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus3/ibycus3.tex
-
- The driver file for this package (in plain tex).
-
- 1a. $TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus3/ibycus3.sty
-
- The driver file for this package (in LaTeX2e).
-
- 2. $TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus3/set3grk.tex
-
- Included by ibygrk.tex unless newnep format is running
-
- 3. $TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus3/tlgsqq.tex
-
- The name suggests the association with coding of the
- Thesaurus Linguae Graecae.
-
- This file provides uniquely named macros for all combinations
- of letter and accent, so that any invocation of the macro will
- produce a sequence of characters corresponding with the
- entries put into the TFM ligature table. These sequences may
- always be used to generate accented characters. They are
- based, with some slight modifications where David Packard's Ibycus
- input coding seems too misleading, on the Ibycus adaptation of
- TLG beta-code. ) and ( are used for breathings, ' and ` are
- used for oxytone and barytone (to avoid preemption of the
- usual TeX excape character) and = is used for perispomenon
- to avoid preemption of the active tie character in plain.tex.
- | is used for iota subscript. Order is significant.
- Breathings or diereses come first, after the affected letter, then
- accents, then iota subscript. + is dieresis, which should
- only appear after u or i. '' is the mark of elision
- Single quotes may be provided by `` and '', but isolate them
- in braces whereever the first of either pair risks being
- interpreted as an accent.
-
- The digraphs, trigraphs etc can be read from tlgsqq.tex
-
- Additional digraphs are K+ Koppa, k+ koppa, C+ lunate Cigma,
- c+ lunate cigma, s+ sampi (lowercase late form only) and s| which
- forces a medial sigma at word end.
- << and >> give guillemets (not guillemots as Adobe
- ornithologically supposes) and (( )) give single parentheses
- though care must be taken that the first ( or ) is not
- interpreted as a breathing. {((} and {))} are safe.
-
- 4. ibycus3.map
-
- This is {\em exactly} the same file as is used by METAFONT.
- Copy $TEXMF/fonts/source/public/ibycus3/ibycus3.map
- to the same directory as ibycus3.tex
- or, even better, link it with a symbolic link.
- It is so structured that it can be read by either
- TeX or Metafont. The mapping is very close to that of GreekKeys,
- which is distributed for the Macintosh by the American
- Philological Association. Other mappings can be created
- in the same manner.
-
- 5. $TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus3/Uibycus3.fd
-
- Supporting fd file for LaTeX2e.
-
- 6. $TEXMF/tex/generic/ibycus3/iby3extr.tex
-
- Some editorial symbols for classical editions.
-
- 7. $TEXMF/tex/generic/ibygrk/ibycus3.ltx
- $TEXMF/tex/generic/ibygrk/iby3text.tex
- The exquisite little poem by Ibycus of Rhegium, until recently
- almost the only thing known by him. (The Ibycus system
- developed by David Packard is only indirectly named after
- the poet. The direct inspiration was Packard's cat.)
-
-NOTE: Earlier users of this package may be dismayed by the new naming
-system for the fonts, but it seems the only way to provide for
-desirable results. It is necessary to keep this Ibycus package
-clearly distinct from the new package announced below. Symbolic
-links are provided to ease the transition. Ibycus4 (see below) will
-be as close as possible to Ibycus3 in all external respects, but
-there are some improved set widths which might clobber old carefully
-adjusted text spacings.
-
-The new naming convention uses "ibycus3" wherever possible, and
-the shorter string "iby3" where that would lead to ambiguity.
-some of the individual METAFONT character files are simply
-taged with the number 3. 8+3 filename compatibility is preserved.
-(with difficulty).
-
-The names of PK and TFM files follow Karl Berry's font name convention
-( 84 is the encoding for Ibycus 4, for which see below).
-
-Foundry Facename Weights Variants Encoding_Variants DesignSize
-
-f ib [r], b r, o 83, 84 [10], 9, 8
-
-fibr83 fibo83 fibb83
-
- with METAFONT design-size additions
-fibr838 fibo838 fibb838
-fibr839 fibo839 fibb839
-
-
-
-Still in the future.
-
- Ibycus4 will have the major epigraphical characters and conventions,
- dotted letters, epsilon and omicron with perispomene accent
- for pre-403 Attic orthography, uprighted italic h for aspirate and
- a special set of TFM files for "stoichedon" inscriptions.
- Maybe even a prime that really works for numbers.
- The input coding for Ibycus4 is hardly changed at all from
- Ibycus3 coding: The apostrophe and single quotes can be
- given as ` {`} and ' {'} instead of having to be doubled
- and <> give conjectural emendation angle brackets without
- requiring an excursion into math mode. ! {\bang} gives
- a dotted letter for all except iota-subscripted vowels.
- Slight improvements in set widths, which is the chief reason
- for keeping Ibycus3 and Ibycus4 clearly separate.
-
- Also in the works, a type1 version.
-
-Pierre A. MacKay
-Department of Classics
-University of Washington
-mackay@cs.washington.edu
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/ibycus4.ltx new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/ibycus4.ltx
--- old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/ibycus4.ltx 2008-02-05 20:05:39.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/ibycus4.ltx 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-% ibycus4.ltx-- P.A. MacKay -- July 13, 1997
-% Pierre A. MacKay, Dept. of Classics, University of Washington
-% mackay@cs.washington.edu
-% ------------------------
-% An example of ibycus4 using LaTeX2e
-%
-% Text from D. L. Page, {\it Greek Melic Poets}, (Oxford, 1962), p. 148
-% accepting the emendations of Mehlhorn and Hermann.
-%
-\documentclass[11pt]{article}
-\usepackage{ibycus4}
-\pagestyle{empty}
-
-\begin{document}
-\begin{center}
-\greek{\fontsize{20.74}{17pt}\selectfont
-IBUKOU TOU RHGINOU}
-\end{center}
-
-\vspace{.5in}
-
-\greek{
-\fontsize{14}{17pt}\selectfont
-\begin{verse}
-\leavevmode\llap{)=}Hri me`n ai(' te Kudw'niai\\
-mhli'des a)rdo'menai r(oa=n\\
-e)k pota'mwn i('na Parqe'nwn\\
-kh=pos a)kh'ratos, ai(' t' oi)nanqi'des\\
-au)co'menai skie'roisin u(f' e('rnesin\\
-oi)nare'ois qale'qoisin; e)moi` d' e)'ros\\
-ou)demi'an kata'koitos w('ran.\\
-q' u(po` steropa=s fle'gwn\\
-Qrhi+'kios Bore'as a)i's|-\\
-\quad swn para` Ku'pridos a)zale'ais mani'aisin e)remno`s a)qambh`s\\
-e)gkrate'ws pedo'qen \dagger fla'sen\dagger\\
-h(mete'ras fre'nas.
-\end{verse}}
-\end{document}
-
-\bye
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/psibycus.ltx new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/psibycus.ltx
--- old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/psibycus.ltx 2008-02-05 20:05:39.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/psibycus.ltx 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-% psibycus.ltx-- P.A. MacKay -- July 16, 1999
-% Pierre A. MacKay, Dept. of Classics, University of Washington
-% mackay@cs.washington.edu
-% ------------------------
-% An example of ibycus4 using LaTeX2e and calling on the type1
-% font IbycusHTG-Regular in place of fibr84
-%
-% Text from D. L. Page, {\it Greek Melic Poets}, (Oxford, 1962), p. 148
-% accepting the emendations of Mehlhorn and Hermann.
-%
-\documentclass[11pt]{article}
-\usepackage{psibycus}
-\pagestyle{empty}
-
-\begin{document}
-\begin{center}
-\greek{\fontsize{20.74}{17pt}\selectfont
-IBUKOU TOU RHGINOU}
-\end{center}
-
-\vspace{.5in}
-
-\greek{
-\fontsize{14}{17pt}\selectfont
-\begin{verse}
-\leavevmode\llap{)=}Hri me`n ai(' te Kudw'niai\\
-mhli'des a)rdo'menai r(oa=n\\
-e)k pota'mwn i('na Parqe'nwn\\
-kh=pos a)kh'ratos, ai(' t' oi)nanqi'des\\
-au)co'menai skie'roisin u(f' e('rnesin\\
-oi)nare'ois qale'qoisin; e)moi` d' e)'ros\\
-ou)demi'an kata'koitos w('ran.\\
-q' u(po` steropa=s fle'gwn\\
-Qrhi+'kios Bore'as a)i's|-\\
-\quad swn para` Ku'pridos a)zale'ais mani'aisin e)remno`s a)qambh`s\\
-e)gkrate'ws pedo'qen \dagger fla'sen\dagger\\
-h(mete'ras fre'nas.
-\end{verse}}
-\end{document}
-
-\bye
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/psibycus.tex new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/psibycus.tex
--- old/doc/fonts/ibygrk/psibycus.tex 2008-02-05 20:05:39.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/fonts/ibygrk/psibycus.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-% psibycus.tex-- P.A. MacKay -- July 16, 1999
-% Pierre A. MacKay, Dept. of Classics, University of Washington
-% mackay@cs.washington.edu
-% ------------------------
-% An example of ibycus4 using plain TeX and invoking the type1 font
-% IbycusHTG-Regular
-%
-% Text from D. L. Page, {\it Greek Melic Poets}, (Oxford, 1962), p. 148
-% accepting the emendations of Mehlhorn and Hermann.
-%
-\hsize 4in
-\input ibycusps
-\setgreek11/14
-\let\!=\dagger
-
-\GK
-
-\centerline{IBUKOU TOU RHGINOU}
-
-\bigskip
-
-\leavevmode\llap{)=}Hri me`n ai(' te Kudw'niai
-
-mhli'des a)rdo'menai r(oa=n
-
-e)k pota'mwn i('na Parqe'nwn
-
-kh=pos a)kh'ratos, ai(' t' oi)nanqi'des
-
-au)co'menai skie'roisin u(f' e('rnesin
-
-oi)nare'ois qale'qoisin; e)moi` d' e)'ros
-
-ou)demi'an kata'koitos w('ran.
-
-q' u(po` steropa=s fle'gwn
-
-Qrhi+'kios Bore'as a)i's|-
-
-\quad swn para` Ku'pridos a)zale'ais mani'aisin e)remno`s a)qambh`s
-
-e)gkrate'ws pedo'qen \!fla'sen\!
-
-h(mete'ras fre'nas.
-
-\RM
-
-\end
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/fge.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/fge.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/fge.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/fge.doc.tlpobj 2011-12-04 04:35:05.000000000 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+name fge.doc
+category Package
+revision 24732
+shortdesc doc files of fge
+relocated 1
+docfiles size=36
+ RELOC/doc/fonts/fge/README
+ RELOC/doc/fonts/fge/fge-doc.pdf
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/ibygrk.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/ibygrk.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/ibygrk.doc.tlpobj 2010-06-10 18:29:42.000000000 +0200
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/ibygrk.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-name ibygrk.doc
-category Package
-revision 15878
-shortdesc doc files of ibygrk
-relocated 1
-docfiles size=18
- RELOC/doc/fonts/ibygrk/COPYING
- RELOC/doc/fonts/ibygrk/NEWS
- RELOC/doc/fonts/ibygrk/README
- RELOC/doc/fonts/ibygrk/README.ibycus4
- RELOC/doc/fonts/ibygrk/iby4text.tex
- RELOC/doc/fonts/ibygrk/ibycus3.RME
- RELOC/doc/fonts/ibygrk/ibycus4.ltx
- RELOC/doc/fonts/ibygrk/psibycus.ltx
- RELOC/doc/fonts/ibygrk/psibycus.tex
++++++ ibygrk.doc.tar.xz -> fge.tar.xz ++++++
++++ 3501 lines of diff (skipped)
++++++ initials.doc.tar.xz -> finbib.tar.xz ++++++
++++ 1868 lines of diff (skipped)
++++++ inconsolata.doc.tar.xz -> fn2end.doc.tar.xz ++++++
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/ChangeLog new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/ChangeLog
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/ChangeLog 2010-09-14 02:05:01.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/ChangeLog 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-2010-09-06 Karl Berry
-
- * GNUmakefile (otftotfm_opt): need --no-type1 to avoid Inconsolata.pfb
- being rebuilt from the otf by otftotfm;
- need --no-warn-missing to avoid warnings since --no-virtual is in use.
-
- * fi4-ot1tt.enc (less, greater): use instead of angleleft, angleright.
- From Jim Whitehead II, 6 Sep 2010 18:24:46.
-
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/GNUmakefile new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/GNUmakefile
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/GNUmakefile 2010-09-14 02:05:01.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/GNUmakefile 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,118 +0,0 @@
-# Copyright 2009, 2010 Karl Berry.
-# You may freely use, modify and/or distribute this file.
-
-default: test-textless.pdf test-spacing.pdf inconsolata.pdf
-# fonttable.pdf # ly1-nfsstest.pdf # check-coverage # compare-ts1-fix
-
-# nice dump of what's in the font, showing glyph names.
-fonttable.pdf: fonttable.ps
- ps2pdf -dEmbedAllFonts -dPDFX=true $< $@
-fonttable.ps: Inconsolata.pfa
- t1testpage Inconsolata.pfa -o $@
-
-inconsolata.pdf: inconsolata.tex test.pdf
- pdflatex '\nonstopmode\input $<' || { rm -f $@; exit 1; }
-
-# test document. We handcrafted the fd and map files.
-test.pdf: test.tex \
- inconsolata.sty fi4.map \
- ec-inconsolata.tfm t1fi4.fd \
- ei1-inconsolata.tfm ei1fi4.fd \
- qx-inconsolata.tfm qxfi4.fd \
- rm-inconsolata.tfm ot1fi4.fd \
- texnansi-inconsolata.tfm ly1fi4.fd \
- ts1-inconsolata.tfm ts1fi4.fd \
-#
- pdflatex '\nonstopmode\input $<' || { rm -f $@; exit 1; }
-
-
-# test document checking stretch & shrink being zero.
-test-spacing.pdf: test-spacing.tex ec-inconsolata.tfm
- pdflatex '\nonstopmode\input $<' || { rm -f $@; exit 1; }
-
-# test document for \textless.
-test-textless.pdf: test-textless.tex rm-inconsolata.tfm
- pdflatex '\nonstopmode\input $<' || { rm -f $@; exit 1; }
-
-# make individual tfm's from our handcrafted encoding files using otftotfm.
-# This being a typewriter font, there are no kerns or ligatures, so no
-# -fkern -fliga.
-otftotfm = otftotfm $(otftotfm_opt)
-otftotfm_opt = --fixed-width --no-virtual --no-encoding \
---no-warn-missing --no-type1
-
-ec-inconsolata.tfm: Inconsolata.otf Inconsolata.pfb fi4-ec.enc
- $(otftotfm) -e fi4-ec.enc $< `basename $@ .tfm`;ls -l Inconsolata.pfb
-
-ei1-inconsolata.tfm: Inconsolata.otf Inconsolata.pfb fi4-ei1.enc
- $(otftotfm) -e fi4-ei1.enc $< `basename $@ .tfm`;ls -l Inconsolata.pfb
-
-rm-inconsolata.tfm: Inconsolata.otf Inconsolata.pfb fi4-ot1tt.enc
- $(otftotfm) -e fi4-ot1tt.enc $< `basename $@ .tfm`;ls -l Inconsolata.pfb
-
-qx-inconsolata.tfm: Inconsolata.otf Inconsolata.pfb
- $(otftotfm) -e fi4-qxtt.enc $< `basename $@ .tfm`;ls -l Inconsolata.pfb
-
-texnansi-inconsolata.tfm: Inconsolata.otf Inconsolata.pfb fi4-texnansi.enc
- $(otftotfm) -e fi4-texnansi.enc $< `basename $@ .tfm`;ls -l Inconsolata.pfb
-
-ts1-inconsolata.tfm: Inconsolata.otf Inconsolata.pfb fi4-ts1.enc
- $(otftotfm) -e fi4-ts1.enc $< `basename $@ .tfm`;ls -l Inconsolata.pfb
-
-# The original distribution only has pfa; we want to work with pfb.
-Inconsolata.pfb: Inconsolata.pfa
- t1binary $< >$@
-
-# testing with the nfsstest document.
-ly1-nfsstest.pdf:
- printf "\nLY1\nfi4\n\n\n\n%s\n" '\bigtest\bye' | pdflatex nfsstest
-
-# create list of glyph names using otfinfo.
-# the NameMe glyphs are empty, so leave them out.
-names/inconsolata.nam: Inconsolata.otf
- otfinfo -g $< | fgrep -v NameMe | sort >$@ || rm -f $@
-
-# create list of glyph names via creation of an afm; but the afm
-# has wrong [OU]dblacute entries with gs 8.64. Did not try to debug.
-#names/inconsolata.nam: inconsolata.afm
-# awk '$$1=="C" {print $$8}' $< | grep -v NameMe | sort >$@ || rm -f $@
-#inconsolata.afm: Inconsolata.pfa
-# pf2afm $<
-# mv Inconsolata.afm $@
-
-# for a given encoding, extract its names.
-# have to mkdir names before running this.
-names/%.nam: %.enc GNUmakefile
- cat $< \
- | sed -e 's/ *%.*$$//' -e 's/ *$$//' -e 's/^ *//' \
- | tr ' ' '\n' \
- | sed -e 's,^/,,' \
- | egrep -v '^$$|[][]' | sort -u >$@
-
-.PRECIOUS: names/%.nam
-
-# step 1: compare names in canonical encoding to inconsolata names.
-compare-%-orig: names/inconsolata.nam names/%.nam
- comm -13 $^
-
-# step 2: compare names in custom encoding to inconsolata names.
-compare-%-fix: names/inconsolata.nam names/fi4-%.nam
- comm -13 $^
-
-# at the end, see which glyphs in the font we have not used.
-# Exclude checking of Dcroat (=Eth) and uni02C9 (=macron).
-check-coverage: names/inconsolata.nam names/all-concat.nam
- -comm -23 $^ | egrep -v 'Dcroat|uni02C9'
-all-concat.enc: $(wildcard fi4-*.enc)
- sort -u $^ >$@
-
-# distribution tarball for CTAN.
-dist: inconsolata.zip
-inconsolata.zip: Inconsolata.otf Inconsolata.pfb Inconsolata.sfd \
- ChangeLog GNUmakefile NEWS README \
- fonttable.pdf test.pdf test*.tex \
- inconsolata.sty *-inconsolata.tfm \
- fi4.map fi4*.enc *fi4.fd inconsolata.pdf inconsolata.tex
- rm -f $@
- zip -q $@ $^
- @ls -l $@
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/NEWS new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/NEWS
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/NEWS 2010-09-14 02:05:01.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/NEWS 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-Public domain.
-
-2010/09/06 need less/greater for ot1tt.
-2009/11/28 make stretch and shrink zero, extraspace = wordspace, like cmtt.
-2009/06/07 initial release.
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/README new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/README
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/README 2009-11-30 02:12:32.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/README 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-Copyright 2009 Karl Berry.
-You may freely use, modify and/or distribute this file.
-
-Inconsolata is a monospaced font designed by Raph Levien;
-home page: http://levien.com/type/myfonts/inconsolata.html.
-It is released by Raph in both OpenType and Type 1 formats.
-
-The (La)TeX support was created by Karl Berry (karl@freefriends.org);
-CTAN location: http://mirror.ctan.org/fonts/inconsolata.
-
-The T1 (ec), TS1, OT1, QX, and LY1 (texnansi) encodings are mostly
-supported, with some missing glyphs (especially in TS1). The fi4
-identification string used in some files (and macros) is the fontname
-prefix and LaTeX family name.
-
-The documentation is in inconsolata.{tex,pdf}. The fonttable.pdf file
-shows all the glyphs in the font; it was created with t1testpage. The
-test.{tex,pdf} files show typical usage.
-
-Best to send bug reports and suggestions to Karl for triage, at least;
-Raph was not involved with anything TeX-specific.
-
-The font is released under the SIL OFL; the LaTeX and other support
-files under an all-permissive license or released to the public domain.
Files old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/fonttable.pdf and new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/fonttable.pdf differ
Files old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/inconsolata.pdf and new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/inconsolata.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/inconsolata.tex new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/inconsolata.tex
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/inconsolata.tex 2009-11-30 02:12:32.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/inconsolata.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,157 +0,0 @@
-% Public domain.
-\documentclass[11pt]{article}
-
-\usepackage{graphicx}
-\usepackage{pdfpages}
-\usepackage{url}
-\usepackage{microtype}
-
-% Don't require entries in the system map files (but do require pdftex).
-\pdfmapfile{+fi4.map}
-\usepackage{inconsolata}
-
-\title{Inconsolata: \TeX\ support\thanks{This documentation is released
-to the public domain.}}
-
-\author{Karl Berry ({\tt karl@freefriends.org})}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\maketitle
-
-Inconsolata is a monospaced (``typewriter'') font designed by Raph
-Levien. (It is used for the typewriter material throughout this
-document.) The location on CTAN for this packaging of the font with
-\TeX\ support is \url{http://mirror.ctan.org/fonts/inconsolata}.
-
-Raph's own web page is
-\url{http://levien.com/type/myfonts/inconsolata.html}. Raph discussed
-Inconsolata's design principles and his working methods in an interview,
-which is available online at \url{http://tug.org/interviews}. Its
-development is ongoing.
-
-Please send questions and suggestions about the \TeX\ support to Karl
-(address above), not Raph. Raph only distributes the OpenType and
-Type~1 font files themselves.
-
-\section{Encodings}
-
-Inconsolata has good support for Latin, including commonly-used \TeX\
-encodings. Unfortunately there are a plethora of naming conventions
-surrounding encodings. This package follows the Latin Modern
-(\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/lm}) names for the TFM
-files.
-
-This table shows the TFM name, corresponding \LaTeX\ encoding name, and
-a description.
-
-\smallskip
-\halign{\tt#\quad\hfil &\tt#\quad\hfil \hfil\cr
-ec-inconsolata.tfm & T1 & Cork \cr
-ei1-inconsolata.tfm & EI1 & experimental/extra glyphs \cr
-qx-inconsolata.tfm & QX & Polish \cr
-rm-inconsolata.tfm & OT1 & Computer Modern typewriter \cr
-texnansi-inconsolata.tfm & LY1 & Windows ANSI \cr
-ts1-inconsolata.tfm & TS1 & text symbols (incomplete) \cr
-}
-
-To use one or another encoding, give the \LaTeX\ name to the
-\texttt{fontenc} package as usual, as in:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\usepackage{inconsolata}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-About the \texttt{EI1} encoding: Raph designed various glyphs which do
-not appear in any of the usual \TeX\ encodings above; \texttt{EI1}
-provides access to these. There are no named commands for them, just
-use \verb|\char| and enjoy. For the glyph names, see the file
-\url{fi4-ei1.enc}.
-
-
-\section{\LaTeX\ usage}
-
-Here is a minimal \LaTeX\ document showing the use of Inconsolata:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\documentclass{article}
-\usepackage{inconsolata}
-\begin{document}
-\texttt{This is Inconsolata.}
-\end{document}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-Thus, loading \url{inconsolata.sty} redefines the \verb|\tt| font.
-The optional \texttt{[nott]} argument prevents this redefinition.
-The font can still be accessed via, for example,
-\begin{verbatim}
-\fontfamily{fi4}\selectfont
-\end{verbatim}
-
-As seen here, the \LaTeX\ family name for Inconsolata is \texttt{fi4}.
-
-The other package option is \texttt{[scaled=R]}, which scales the font
-according to $R$; the default is 1.0 for no scaling (this document
-does not specify any scaling). Here's an example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\usepackage[scaled=.95]{inconsolata}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The \url{inconsolata.sty} package loads the \url{textcomp} and
-\url{keyval} packages, if they are not already loaded. The former is
-what makes \verb|\texteuro| and the like work, and the latter is how
-\url{inconsolata} parses its options.
-
-
-\section{Plain \TeX\ usage}
-
-The TFM names were given in the preceding table. So, for example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\font\tentt = rm-inconsolata % use inconsolata instead of cmtt
-{\tt This is Inconsolata.}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-As usual with plain \TeX, any other (re)definitions are strictly up to
-you. This package makes no attempt to hook into any of the various font
-packages for plain, such as plnfss
-(\url{http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/plnfss}).
-
-\section{X usage}
-
-If you want to use Inconsolata in the X Window System, for example in
-terminal windows, and your system does not provide a premade package for
-it, it is straightforward to set up yourself:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-cp Inconsolata.otf /some/dir
-mkfontscale /some/dir # create fonts.scale
-mkfontdir /some/dir # create fonts.dir from fonts.scale
-xset +fp /some/dir # tell the X server to use it
-xlsfonts | grep inconsolata # see if it's there
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-\section{Dotless \j\ and LY1}
-
-For reasons I don't want to go into here, the \verb|\j| command does not
-work with the LY1 encoding. Perhaps it will be fixed one day.
-Meanwhile, the glyph itself is available at the standard position in
-LY1 of \texttt{0x11} in \texttt{texnansi-inconsolata.tfm}.
-
-
-\section{Font tables}
-
-The rest of this document are the font tables for the various encodings,
-generated by the file \url{test.tex} in this distribution. The type
-size is somewhat large simply for ease of inspection of the characters.
-
-Happy typesetting.
-
-% too bad we can't say "all pages but the last".
-\includepdf[pages=-6]{test.pdf}
-
-\end{document}
-
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-spacing.tex new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-spacing.tex
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-spacing.tex 2010-09-14 02:05:01.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-spacing.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-% From Enrico Gregorio, testing stretch and shrink of the font.
-% Public domain.
-\documentclass{article}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\usepackage{inconsolata}
-\parindent=0pt
-
-\begin{document}
-\ttfamily
-Inconsolata
-
-\settowidth{\dimen0}{123456789012345678901234567}
-
-\vbox{\hsize=\dimen0
-1234567890123456789012345\\
-This should be monospaced\\
-without spaces shrinking!\\
-1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 28
-}
-
-In the following only 30
-characters should fit:
-
-\settowidth{\dimen0}{A}
-
-\leavevmode\hbox to30\dimen0{%
-1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8} (they are 35)
-
-\hbox{%
-123456789012345678901234567890}
-
-%
-\bigskip \hrule \bigskip
-
-\fontfamily{cmtt}\selectfont
-Computer Modern Typewriter
-
-\settowidth{\dimen0}{123456789012345678901234567}
-
-\vbox{\hsize=\dimen0
-1234567890123456789012345\\
-This should be monospaced\\
-without spaces shrinking!\\
-1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 28
-}
-
-In the following only 30
-characters should fit:
-
-\settowidth{\dimen0}{A}
-
-\leavevmode\hbox to30\dimen0{%
-1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8} (they are 35)
-
-\hbox{%
-123456789012345678901234567890}
-
-\end{document}
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-textless.tex new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-textless.tex
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-textless.tex 2010-09-14 02:05:01.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-textless.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-\documentclass{article}
-\usepackage{inconsolata}
-\begin{document}
-\texttt{This is a lessthan sign in Inconsolata: <}
-
-\texttt{This is a lessthan sign in Inconsolata: \textless{}}
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-This is a verbatim lessthan sign: <
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\end{document}
Files old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test.pdf and new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test.tex new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test.tex
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test.tex 2009-06-06 01:45:52.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-% Copyright 2009 Karl Berry.
-% You may freely use, modify and/or distribute this file.
-
-\documentclass{article}
-
-% No need for excessive margins.
-\usepackage{fullpage}
-
-% Try to output everything in a given TFM.
-\usepackage{fonttable}
-
-% What we're testing.
-\usepackage{inconsolata} % can use [scaled=1.1]
-
-% For testing, much easier not to have to put entries in the system map files.
-\pdfmapfile{+fi4.map}
-
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-
-\def\dofontenc#1#2{{\tt #1:} \fonttable{#2 at 15pt}\newpage}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\thispagestyle{empty}
-\pagestyle{empty}
-
-% tables of (mostly) supported encodings.
-% To actually use them in a document, need to specify
-% \usepackage[XYZ1]{fontenc}
-% where XYZ1 is the LaTeX encoding name: T1, TS1, EI1, OT1, LY1, QX.
-%
-\dofontenc{ec/T1}{ec-inconsolata}
-\dofontenc{EI1}{ei1-inconsolata}
-\dofontenc{qx/QXtt}{qx-inconsolata}
-\dofontenc{rm/OT1tt}{rm-inconsolata}
-\dofontenc{texnansi/LY1}{texnansi-inconsolata}
-\dofontenc{TS1}{ts1-inconsolata}
-
-\rm A bit of text in cmr: Hello \textparagraph \texteuro end.\par
-\tt Switching to tt for Inconsolata: ``Hello'' \textparagraph
-end. O0123456789. `H\'e\'al\`e\`ane' \& \`\i
-\'\j see documentation about dotless j.
-
-\sf this is sf.
-\end{document}
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/testmin.tex new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/testmin.tex
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/testmin.tex 2010-09-14 02:05:01.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/testmin.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-\documentclass{article}
-\usepackage{inconsolata} % can use [scaled=1.1]
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\begin{document}
-\thispagestyle{empty}
-{\tt Inconsolata.}
-\end{document}
Files old/doc/latex/fn2end/fn2end.pdf and new/doc/latex/fn2end/fn2end.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/fn2end/fn2end.tex new/doc/latex/fn2end/fn2end.tex
--- old/doc/latex/fn2end/fn2end.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/latex/fn2end/fn2end.tex 2008-12-31 19:45:12.000000000 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+\documentclass{article}
+\newcommand{\cs}[1]{\mbox{\tt\bs#1}}% for control sequences
+\newcommand{\bs}{\char '134 } % A backslash character for \tt font
+\newcommand{\file}[1]{\mbox{\tt #1}}
+
+\title{The {\tt fn2end.sty} style}
+\author{KC Border}
+\date{May 31, 1995}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+The \file{fn2end.sty} package converts footnotes into
+end notes, where a lot of publishers want them. It
+does so by redefining the action of the \cs{footnote}
+command. Instead of putting footnotes at the bottom
+of the page, the notes are written to a file with
+extension \file{end}, whence they may be retrieved
+when desired. To handle footnotes on the title page
+flexibly, \cs{footnote} is not redefined until the
+\cs{makeendnotes} command is issued. Place the
+command \cs{theendnotes} where you want the notes
+to appear: after the last footnote, usually right
+before the bibliography. The \cs{theendotes} command
+merely \cs{inputs} the \file{end} file, it does {\em
+not} create a new section or a new page. If you do
+create a notes section with the \cs{section} command,
+you should follow it with an \cs{indent} command.
+Otherwise, the first note will be the only note that
+does not start with an indented paragraph.
+
+There are now user renewable commands. The length
+\cs{noteskip} is the space between the note number
+and the start of the note text. By default it is 1
+em. Change its value with the \cs{setlength} command.
+You can use \cs{renewcommand} to change
+\cs{notenumberformat}, which formats the note number.
+By default it is defined as
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newcommand{\notenumberformat}[1]{$#1$}
+\end{verbatim}
+If you want the end note numbers to appear as
+superscripts with periods, you could
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \renewcommand{\notenumberformat}[1]{${}^{#1.}$}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Successive \cs{makeendnotes} commands overwrite the
+notes file. This is a feature, not a bug. For
+example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \makeendnotes
+
+ \chapter{One}
+ blah
+ \section*{Notes}\indent
+ \theendnotes
+
+ \makeendnotes
+
+ \chapter{Two}
+ blah
+ \section*{Notes}\indent
+ \theendnotes
+\end{verbatim}
+etc, can be used to put notes at the end of each
+chapter. (This is perverse because it makes the
+notes nearly impossible to find, but some publishers
+like it.)
+
+Additionally, \cs{restorefootnotes} restores the
+normal behavior of footnotes, so that if you really
+wanted to, you could have a title page for each
+chapter with acknowledgment footnotes on the bottom,
+and thereafter have end notes for the rest of the
+material in the chapter.
+
+
+{\em Bug}: Since \verb#\# is catcoded to 12 for
+verbatim copying, if your footnote's text contains
+an unequal number of \verb#\{#'s and \verb#\}#'s,
+for instance, if you have a \verb#\left\{# balanced
+by a \verb#\right.#, then \TeX\ believes you have
+unmatched braces and does not figure out where the
+argument of the \cs{footnote} command ends. (Believe
+it or not, this happened to me the first time I
+tried to use the style.)
+{\em Workaround}: Use \verb#\lbrace# and \verb#\rbrace#
+in your footnotes instead of \verb#\{# and \verb#\}#.
+
+\end{document}
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/fn2end.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/fn2end.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/fn2end.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/fn2end.doc.tlpobj 2010-06-10 18:27:42.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+name fn2end.doc
+category Package
+revision 15878
+shortdesc doc files of fn2end
+relocated 1
+docfiles size=8
+ RELOC/doc/latex/fn2end/fn2end.pdf
+ RELOC/doc/latex/fn2end/fn2end.tex
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/inconsolata.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/inconsolata.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/inconsolata.doc.tlpobj 2010-09-14 04:04:41.000000000 +0200
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/inconsolata.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-name inconsolata.doc
-category Package
-revision 19721
-shortdesc doc files of inconsolata
-relocated 1
-docfiles size=116
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/ChangeLog
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/GNUmakefile
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/NEWS
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/README
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/fonttable.pdf
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/inconsolata.pdf
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/inconsolata.tex
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-spacing.tex
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-textless.tex
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test.pdf
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test.tex
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/testmin.tex
++++++ inconsolata.doc.tar.xz -> fn2end.tar.xz ++++++
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/ChangeLog new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/ChangeLog
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/ChangeLog 2010-09-14 02:05:01.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/ChangeLog 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-2010-09-06 Karl Berry
-
- * GNUmakefile (otftotfm_opt): need --no-type1 to avoid Inconsolata.pfb
- being rebuilt from the otf by otftotfm;
- need --no-warn-missing to avoid warnings since --no-virtual is in use.
-
- * fi4-ot1tt.enc (less, greater): use instead of angleleft, angleright.
- From Jim Whitehead II, 6 Sep 2010 18:24:46.
-
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/GNUmakefile new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/GNUmakefile
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/GNUmakefile 2010-09-14 02:05:01.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/GNUmakefile 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,118 +0,0 @@
-# Copyright 2009, 2010 Karl Berry.
-# You may freely use, modify and/or distribute this file.
-
-default: test-textless.pdf test-spacing.pdf inconsolata.pdf
-# fonttable.pdf # ly1-nfsstest.pdf # check-coverage # compare-ts1-fix
-
-# nice dump of what's in the font, showing glyph names.
-fonttable.pdf: fonttable.ps
- ps2pdf -dEmbedAllFonts -dPDFX=true $< $@
-fonttable.ps: Inconsolata.pfa
- t1testpage Inconsolata.pfa -o $@
-
-inconsolata.pdf: inconsolata.tex test.pdf
- pdflatex '\nonstopmode\input $<' || { rm -f $@; exit 1; }
-
-# test document. We handcrafted the fd and map files.
-test.pdf: test.tex \
- inconsolata.sty fi4.map \
- ec-inconsolata.tfm t1fi4.fd \
- ei1-inconsolata.tfm ei1fi4.fd \
- qx-inconsolata.tfm qxfi4.fd \
- rm-inconsolata.tfm ot1fi4.fd \
- texnansi-inconsolata.tfm ly1fi4.fd \
- ts1-inconsolata.tfm ts1fi4.fd \
-#
- pdflatex '\nonstopmode\input $<' || { rm -f $@; exit 1; }
-
-
-# test document checking stretch & shrink being zero.
-test-spacing.pdf: test-spacing.tex ec-inconsolata.tfm
- pdflatex '\nonstopmode\input $<' || { rm -f $@; exit 1; }
-
-# test document for \textless.
-test-textless.pdf: test-textless.tex rm-inconsolata.tfm
- pdflatex '\nonstopmode\input $<' || { rm -f $@; exit 1; }
-
-# make individual tfm's from our handcrafted encoding files using otftotfm.
-# This being a typewriter font, there are no kerns or ligatures, so no
-# -fkern -fliga.
-otftotfm = otftotfm $(otftotfm_opt)
-otftotfm_opt = --fixed-width --no-virtual --no-encoding \
---no-warn-missing --no-type1
-
-ec-inconsolata.tfm: Inconsolata.otf Inconsolata.pfb fi4-ec.enc
- $(otftotfm) -e fi4-ec.enc $< `basename $@ .tfm`;ls -l Inconsolata.pfb
-
-ei1-inconsolata.tfm: Inconsolata.otf Inconsolata.pfb fi4-ei1.enc
- $(otftotfm) -e fi4-ei1.enc $< `basename $@ .tfm`;ls -l Inconsolata.pfb
-
-rm-inconsolata.tfm: Inconsolata.otf Inconsolata.pfb fi4-ot1tt.enc
- $(otftotfm) -e fi4-ot1tt.enc $< `basename $@ .tfm`;ls -l Inconsolata.pfb
-
-qx-inconsolata.tfm: Inconsolata.otf Inconsolata.pfb
- $(otftotfm) -e fi4-qxtt.enc $< `basename $@ .tfm`;ls -l Inconsolata.pfb
-
-texnansi-inconsolata.tfm: Inconsolata.otf Inconsolata.pfb fi4-texnansi.enc
- $(otftotfm) -e fi4-texnansi.enc $< `basename $@ .tfm`;ls -l Inconsolata.pfb
-
-ts1-inconsolata.tfm: Inconsolata.otf Inconsolata.pfb fi4-ts1.enc
- $(otftotfm) -e fi4-ts1.enc $< `basename $@ .tfm`;ls -l Inconsolata.pfb
-
-# The original distribution only has pfa; we want to work with pfb.
-Inconsolata.pfb: Inconsolata.pfa
- t1binary $< >$@
-
-# testing with the nfsstest document.
-ly1-nfsstest.pdf:
- printf "\nLY1\nfi4\n\n\n\n%s\n" '\bigtest\bye' | pdflatex nfsstest
-
-# create list of glyph names using otfinfo.
-# the NameMe glyphs are empty, so leave them out.
-names/inconsolata.nam: Inconsolata.otf
- otfinfo -g $< | fgrep -v NameMe | sort >$@ || rm -f $@
-
-# create list of glyph names via creation of an afm; but the afm
-# has wrong [OU]dblacute entries with gs 8.64. Did not try to debug.
-#names/inconsolata.nam: inconsolata.afm
-# awk '$$1=="C" {print $$8}' $< | grep -v NameMe | sort >$@ || rm -f $@
-#inconsolata.afm: Inconsolata.pfa
-# pf2afm $<
-# mv Inconsolata.afm $@
-
-# for a given encoding, extract its names.
-# have to mkdir names before running this.
-names/%.nam: %.enc GNUmakefile
- cat $< \
- | sed -e 's/ *%.*$$//' -e 's/ *$$//' -e 's/^ *//' \
- | tr ' ' '\n' \
- | sed -e 's,^/,,' \
- | egrep -v '^$$|[][]' | sort -u >$@
-
-.PRECIOUS: names/%.nam
-
-# step 1: compare names in canonical encoding to inconsolata names.
-compare-%-orig: names/inconsolata.nam names/%.nam
- comm -13 $^
-
-# step 2: compare names in custom encoding to inconsolata names.
-compare-%-fix: names/inconsolata.nam names/fi4-%.nam
- comm -13 $^
-
-# at the end, see which glyphs in the font we have not used.
-# Exclude checking of Dcroat (=Eth) and uni02C9 (=macron).
-check-coverage: names/inconsolata.nam names/all-concat.nam
- -comm -23 $^ | egrep -v 'Dcroat|uni02C9'
-all-concat.enc: $(wildcard fi4-*.enc)
- sort -u $^ >$@
-
-# distribution tarball for CTAN.
-dist: inconsolata.zip
-inconsolata.zip: Inconsolata.otf Inconsolata.pfb Inconsolata.sfd \
- ChangeLog GNUmakefile NEWS README \
- fonttable.pdf test.pdf test*.tex \
- inconsolata.sty *-inconsolata.tfm \
- fi4.map fi4*.enc *fi4.fd inconsolata.pdf inconsolata.tex
- rm -f $@
- zip -q $@ $^
- @ls -l $@
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/NEWS new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/NEWS
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/NEWS 2010-09-14 02:05:01.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/NEWS 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-Public domain.
-
-2010/09/06 need less/greater for ot1tt.
-2009/11/28 make stretch and shrink zero, extraspace = wordspace, like cmtt.
-2009/06/07 initial release.
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/README new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/README
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/README 2009-11-30 02:12:32.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/README 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-Copyright 2009 Karl Berry.
-You may freely use, modify and/or distribute this file.
-
-Inconsolata is a monospaced font designed by Raph Levien;
-home page: http://levien.com/type/myfonts/inconsolata.html.
-It is released by Raph in both OpenType and Type 1 formats.
-
-The (La)TeX support was created by Karl Berry (karl@freefriends.org);
-CTAN location: http://mirror.ctan.org/fonts/inconsolata.
-
-The T1 (ec), TS1, OT1, QX, and LY1 (texnansi) encodings are mostly
-supported, with some missing glyphs (especially in TS1). The fi4
-identification string used in some files (and macros) is the fontname
-prefix and LaTeX family name.
-
-The documentation is in inconsolata.{tex,pdf}. The fonttable.pdf file
-shows all the glyphs in the font; it was created with t1testpage. The
-test.{tex,pdf} files show typical usage.
-
-Best to send bug reports and suggestions to Karl for triage, at least;
-Raph was not involved with anything TeX-specific.
-
-The font is released under the SIL OFL; the LaTeX and other support
-files under an all-permissive license or released to the public domain.
Files old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/fonttable.pdf and new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/fonttable.pdf differ
Files old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/inconsolata.pdf and new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/inconsolata.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/inconsolata.tex new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/inconsolata.tex
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/inconsolata.tex 2009-11-30 02:12:32.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/inconsolata.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,157 +0,0 @@
-% Public domain.
-\documentclass[11pt]{article}
-
-\usepackage{graphicx}
-\usepackage{pdfpages}
-\usepackage{url}
-\usepackage{microtype}
-
-% Don't require entries in the system map files (but do require pdftex).
-\pdfmapfile{+fi4.map}
-\usepackage{inconsolata}
-
-\title{Inconsolata: \TeX\ support\thanks{This documentation is released
-to the public domain.}}
-
-\author{Karl Berry ({\tt karl@freefriends.org})}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\maketitle
-
-Inconsolata is a monospaced (``typewriter'') font designed by Raph
-Levien. (It is used for the typewriter material throughout this
-document.) The location on CTAN for this packaging of the font with
-\TeX\ support is \url{http://mirror.ctan.org/fonts/inconsolata}.
-
-Raph's own web page is
-\url{http://levien.com/type/myfonts/inconsolata.html}. Raph discussed
-Inconsolata's design principles and his working methods in an interview,
-which is available online at \url{http://tug.org/interviews}. Its
-development is ongoing.
-
-Please send questions and suggestions about the \TeX\ support to Karl
-(address above), not Raph. Raph only distributes the OpenType and
-Type~1 font files themselves.
-
-\section{Encodings}
-
-Inconsolata has good support for Latin, including commonly-used \TeX\
-encodings. Unfortunately there are a plethora of naming conventions
-surrounding encodings. This package follows the Latin Modern
-(\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/lm}) names for the TFM
-files.
-
-This table shows the TFM name, corresponding \LaTeX\ encoding name, and
-a description.
-
-\smallskip
-\halign{\tt#\quad\hfil &\tt#\quad\hfil \hfil\cr
-ec-inconsolata.tfm & T1 & Cork \cr
-ei1-inconsolata.tfm & EI1 & experimental/extra glyphs \cr
-qx-inconsolata.tfm & QX & Polish \cr
-rm-inconsolata.tfm & OT1 & Computer Modern typewriter \cr
-texnansi-inconsolata.tfm & LY1 & Windows ANSI \cr
-ts1-inconsolata.tfm & TS1 & text symbols (incomplete) \cr
-}
-
-To use one or another encoding, give the \LaTeX\ name to the
-\texttt{fontenc} package as usual, as in:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\usepackage{inconsolata}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-About the \texttt{EI1} encoding: Raph designed various glyphs which do
-not appear in any of the usual \TeX\ encodings above; \texttt{EI1}
-provides access to these. There are no named commands for them, just
-use \verb|\char| and enjoy. For the glyph names, see the file
-\url{fi4-ei1.enc}.
-
-
-\section{\LaTeX\ usage}
-
-Here is a minimal \LaTeX\ document showing the use of Inconsolata:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\documentclass{article}
-\usepackage{inconsolata}
-\begin{document}
-\texttt{This is Inconsolata.}
-\end{document}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-Thus, loading \url{inconsolata.sty} redefines the \verb|\tt| font.
-The optional \texttt{[nott]} argument prevents this redefinition.
-The font can still be accessed via, for example,
-\begin{verbatim}
-\fontfamily{fi4}\selectfont
-\end{verbatim}
-
-As seen here, the \LaTeX\ family name for Inconsolata is \texttt{fi4}.
-
-The other package option is \texttt{[scaled=R]}, which scales the font
-according to $R$; the default is 1.0 for no scaling (this document
-does not specify any scaling). Here's an example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\usepackage[scaled=.95]{inconsolata}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The \url{inconsolata.sty} package loads the \url{textcomp} and
-\url{keyval} packages, if they are not already loaded. The former is
-what makes \verb|\texteuro| and the like work, and the latter is how
-\url{inconsolata} parses its options.
-
-
-\section{Plain \TeX\ usage}
-
-The TFM names were given in the preceding table. So, for example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\font\tentt = rm-inconsolata % use inconsolata instead of cmtt
-{\tt This is Inconsolata.}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-As usual with plain \TeX, any other (re)definitions are strictly up to
-you. This package makes no attempt to hook into any of the various font
-packages for plain, such as plnfss
-(\url{http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/plnfss}).
-
-\section{X usage}
-
-If you want to use Inconsolata in the X Window System, for example in
-terminal windows, and your system does not provide a premade package for
-it, it is straightforward to set up yourself:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-cp Inconsolata.otf /some/dir
-mkfontscale /some/dir # create fonts.scale
-mkfontdir /some/dir # create fonts.dir from fonts.scale
-xset +fp /some/dir # tell the X server to use it
-xlsfonts | grep inconsolata # see if it's there
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-\section{Dotless \j\ and LY1}
-
-For reasons I don't want to go into here, the \verb|\j| command does not
-work with the LY1 encoding. Perhaps it will be fixed one day.
-Meanwhile, the glyph itself is available at the standard position in
-LY1 of \texttt{0x11} in \texttt{texnansi-inconsolata.tfm}.
-
-
-\section{Font tables}
-
-The rest of this document are the font tables for the various encodings,
-generated by the file \url{test.tex} in this distribution. The type
-size is somewhat large simply for ease of inspection of the characters.
-
-Happy typesetting.
-
-% too bad we can't say "all pages but the last".
-\includepdf[pages=-6]{test.pdf}
-
-\end{document}
-
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-spacing.tex new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-spacing.tex
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-spacing.tex 2010-09-14 02:05:01.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-spacing.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-% From Enrico Gregorio, testing stretch and shrink of the font.
-% Public domain.
-\documentclass{article}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\usepackage{inconsolata}
-\parindent=0pt
-
-\begin{document}
-\ttfamily
-Inconsolata
-
-\settowidth{\dimen0}{123456789012345678901234567}
-
-\vbox{\hsize=\dimen0
-1234567890123456789012345\\
-This should be monospaced\\
-without spaces shrinking!\\
-1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 28
-}
-
-In the following only 30
-characters should fit:
-
-\settowidth{\dimen0}{A}
-
-\leavevmode\hbox to30\dimen0{%
-1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8} (they are 35)
-
-\hbox{%
-123456789012345678901234567890}
-
-%
-\bigskip \hrule \bigskip
-
-\fontfamily{cmtt}\selectfont
-Computer Modern Typewriter
-
-\settowidth{\dimen0}{123456789012345678901234567}
-
-\vbox{\hsize=\dimen0
-1234567890123456789012345\\
-This should be monospaced\\
-without spaces shrinking!\\
-1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 28
-}
-
-In the following only 30
-characters should fit:
-
-\settowidth{\dimen0}{A}
-
-\leavevmode\hbox to30\dimen0{%
-1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8} (they are 35)
-
-\hbox{%
-123456789012345678901234567890}
-
-\end{document}
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-textless.tex new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-textless.tex
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-textless.tex 2010-09-14 02:05:01.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-textless.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-\documentclass{article}
-\usepackage{inconsolata}
-\begin{document}
-\texttt{This is a lessthan sign in Inconsolata: <}
-
-\texttt{This is a lessthan sign in Inconsolata: \textless{}}
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-This is a verbatim lessthan sign: <
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\end{document}
Files old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test.pdf and new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test.tex new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test.tex
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test.tex 2009-06-06 01:45:52.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-% Copyright 2009 Karl Berry.
-% You may freely use, modify and/or distribute this file.
-
-\documentclass{article}
-
-% No need for excessive margins.
-\usepackage{fullpage}
-
-% Try to output everything in a given TFM.
-\usepackage{fonttable}
-
-% What we're testing.
-\usepackage{inconsolata} % can use [scaled=1.1]
-
-% For testing, much easier not to have to put entries in the system map files.
-\pdfmapfile{+fi4.map}
-
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-
-\def\dofontenc#1#2{{\tt #1:} \fonttable{#2 at 15pt}\newpage}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\thispagestyle{empty}
-\pagestyle{empty}
-
-% tables of (mostly) supported encodings.
-% To actually use them in a document, need to specify
-% \usepackage[XYZ1]{fontenc}
-% where XYZ1 is the LaTeX encoding name: T1, TS1, EI1, OT1, LY1, QX.
-%
-\dofontenc{ec/T1}{ec-inconsolata}
-\dofontenc{EI1}{ei1-inconsolata}
-\dofontenc{qx/QXtt}{qx-inconsolata}
-\dofontenc{rm/OT1tt}{rm-inconsolata}
-\dofontenc{texnansi/LY1}{texnansi-inconsolata}
-\dofontenc{TS1}{ts1-inconsolata}
-
-\rm A bit of text in cmr: Hello \textparagraph \texteuro end.\par
-\tt Switching to tt for Inconsolata: ``Hello'' \textparagraph
-end. O0123456789. `H\'e\'al\`e\`ane' \& \`\i
-\'\j see documentation about dotless j.
-
-\sf this is sf.
-\end{document}
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/testmin.tex new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/testmin.tex
--- old/doc/fonts/inconsolata/testmin.tex 2010-09-14 02:05:01.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/fonts/inconsolata/testmin.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-\documentclass{article}
-\usepackage{inconsolata} % can use [scaled=1.1]
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\begin{document}
-\thispagestyle{empty}
-{\tt Inconsolata.}
-\end{document}
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tex/latex/fn2end/fn2end.sty new/tex/latex/fn2end/fn2end.sty
--- old/tex/latex/fn2end/fn2end.sty 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tex/latex/fn2end/fn2end.sty 2008-12-31 19:45:12.000000000 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+% fn2end.sty Convert footnotes into end notes.
+% LaTeXable documentation at end (after \endinput)
+% LaTeX 2.09 users, should comment out this line:
+\ProvidesPackage{fn2end}[1995/05/31 Convert footnotes into end notes.]
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% This file may be freely copied, and distributed.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% Author:
+% Kim C. Border,
+% Division of the Humanities and Social Sciences,
+% Caltech, Pasadena, CA 91125 USA
+% e-mail: kcb@hss.caltech.edu
+
+% I gratefully acknowledge the help of J. E. Burke
+% at Johns Hopkins, who fixed
+% the handling of long footnotes.
+% The main idea is from Knuth's \answer macro in the TeXbook.
+
+% version 1.1, May 31, 1995
+% Changed \endnoteshere to \theendnotes, since you
+% shouldn't use commands that begin with \end
+% Also added user renewable parameters
+
+% Based on my old endnotes.sty, version 3
+% (Sep 4, 1990, rev. Jul 28, 1994), which was never posted.
+% It appears to work with both LaTeX2e and LaTeX2.09
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% User redefinable parameters
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newlength{\noteskip}
+\setlength{\noteskip}{1em}
+\newcommand{\notenumberformat}[1]{$#1$}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Save the original definition of \@footnotetext
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\let\original@footnotetext\@footnotetext
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Define \makeendnotes to open a new file
+% for the endnotes and to redefine \@footnotetext
+% (\newlinechar courtesy of J E Burke)
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newcommand{\makeendnotes}{\newwrite\n@tefile
+ \immediate\openout\n@tefile=\jobname.end
+ \immediate\write\n@tefile{\relax}
+ \long\gdef\@footnotetext{\immediate\write\n@tefile{}
+ \begingroup\newlinechar=`\^^M
+ \catcode`\^^M=12\@setupcopy\@copynote}}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% The verbatim copying definitions
+% based on the TeXbook's \answer macro
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newcommand{\@setupcopy}{\@sanitize}
+\newcommand{\@copynote}{}
+\long\gdef\@copynote#1{%
+ \immediate\write\n@tefile{\notenumberformat{\@thefnmark}%
+ \hskip\noteskip}%
+ \immediate\write\n@tefile{#1}\endgroup}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Define \theendnotes to retrieve them
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newcommand{\theendnotes}{\immediate\closeout\n@tefile
+ \input\jobname.end\relax}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Define \restorefootnotes
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newcommand{\restorefootnotes}{\long\gdef\@footnotetext{\original@footnotetext}}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\endinput
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/fn2end.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/fn2end.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/fn2end.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/fn2end.tlpobj 2010-06-10 18:27:42.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+name fn2end
+category Package
+revision 15878
+shortdesc Convert footnotes to endnotes.
+relocated 1
+longdesc Defines macros \makeendnotes, which converts \footnote to
+longdesc produce endnotes; and \theendnotes which prints them out.
+runfiles size=1
+ RELOC/tex/latex/fn2end/fn2end.sty
+catalogue-ctan /macros/latex/contrib/fn2end
+catalogue-date 2009-01-03 10:55:55 +0100
+catalogue-license pd
+catalogue-version 1.1
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/inconsolata.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/inconsolata.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/inconsolata.doc.tlpobj 2010-09-14 04:04:41.000000000 +0200
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/inconsolata.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-name inconsolata.doc
-category Package
-revision 19721
-shortdesc doc files of inconsolata
-relocated 1
-docfiles size=116
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/ChangeLog
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/GNUmakefile
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/NEWS
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/README
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/fonttable.pdf
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/inconsolata.pdf
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/inconsolata.tex
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-spacing.tex
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test-textless.tex
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test.pdf
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/test.tex
- RELOC/doc/fonts/inconsolata/testmin.tex
++++++ interactiveworkbook.doc.tar.xz -> fnbreak.doc.tar.xz ++++++
++++ 4693 lines of diff (skipped)
++++++ interactiveworkbook.tar.xz -> fnbreak.tar.xz ++++++
++++ 2164 lines of diff (skipped)
++++++ inputtrc.doc.tar.xz -> fnpara.doc.tar.xz ++++++
Files old/doc/latex/fnpara/fnpara-doc.pdf and new/doc/latex/fnpara/fnpara-doc.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/fnpara/fnpara-doc.tex new/doc/latex/fnpara/fnpara-doc.tex
--- old/doc/latex/fnpara/fnpara-doc.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/latex/fnpara/fnpara-doc.tex 2010-03-02 02:02:19.000000000 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+\documentclass[DIV=9, pagesize=auto]{scrartcl}
+
+\usepackage{fixltx2e}
+\usepackage{etex}
+\usepackage{lmodern}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage{textcomp}
+\usepackage{microtype}
+\usepackage[unicode=true]{hyperref}
+
+\newcommand*{\mail}[1]{\href{mailto:#1}{\texttt{#1}}}
+\newcommand*{\pkg}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+
+\addtokomafont{title}{\rmfamily}
+
+\title{The \pkg{fnpara} package}
+\subtitle{A \LaTeX\ style to typeset footnotes in run-on paragraphs.}
+\author{Chris Rowley\and Dominik Wujastyk\and Bradley Smith}
+\date{11/12/95}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{History:}
+
+A vain attempt at this \LaTeX\ modification was tried in late
+September 1988 by Dominik Wujastyk, and sent to \TeX hax and UK\TeX\ %
+for comment. Chris Rowley came up with a working
+version a few days later, but it still needs thorough testing.
+
+
+\section{The Style:}
+
+This \LaTeX\ style changes the way \LaTeX\ does footnotes. With this
+style invoked (\verb+\documentstyle[fnpara]{article}+), footnotes will
+be typeset in a running paragraph, instead of one above another.
+It is suitable for texts such as critical editions, which contain
+many short footnotes.
+
+This is based on the \TeX\ macros described by Knuth in the
+\TeX book, Dirty Tricks, pages~398--400. It is not tested beyond
+some simple examples. In particular, it has not been tested
+properly in connection with even the simplest of environments, nor with
+other floats.
+
+(In fact, ordinary LaTeX footnotes sometimes do not work well
+if they need splitting (e.\,g.\ producing blank pages,
+or appearing in shufled form): but these
+problems should not affect this style.
+I --CR-- have sent in a Bug Report about some
+of these problems.)
+
+Be aware of Knuth's note on the limitations of this method of
+doing the job: the \TeX\ stack is used four times per footnote,
+and the stack is limited (\TeX book pp.~300--301). So if you have
+very many footnotes (in the hundreds) and encounter
+%
+\begin{verbatim}
+"! TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [... save size ...]"
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+errors, you may need to break your text into smaller sections.
+Fortunately, this is very easy to do with \LaTeX. And the
+footnote counter can be reset to make the joins seamless.
+
+
+\section{Authors}
+
+\KOMAoption{parskip}{half}
+\selectfont
+Chris Rowley\\
+Office tel: (England) 01 794 0575\\
+Janet: \verb+CA_ROWLEY@UK.AC.OPEN.ACS.VAX+
+
+Dominik Wujastyk\\
+Office tel: (England) 01 387 4477 x 3013\\
+Janet: \verb+Wujastyk@UK.AC.UCL.EUCLID+
+
+October 3, 1988
+
+\bigskip
+
+Modified 11/12/95\\
+Updated with new copies of relevant definitions from base files, and
+added definitions for paragraph footnotes inside minipages
+
+Bradley Smith\\
+(612) 624--1535\\
+\mail{basmith@prometheus.chem.umn.edu}
+
+\end{document}
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/inputtrc/README new/doc/latex/inputtrc/README
--- old/doc/latex/inputtrc/README 2012-10-13 14:32:15.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/latex/inputtrc/README 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
- README for the `inputtrc' package
-
- Tracing Which File Loads Which
-
- (C) Uwe Lueck 2012/10/10
-
- http://www.contact-ednotes.sty.de.vu
-
-
-`inputtrc.sty' produces screen/log messages
-`<current> INPUTTING <next>' on LaTeX input commands,
-<current> and <next> being file names.
-The message indents reflect the input nesting level.
-This can be turned on and off, and the "indent unit"
-can be chosen. `RETURNING TO <current>' may be added.
-These messages should help when you otherwise get a screen
-message about some input line number and wonder in which
-file that is.
-
-The implementation somewhat resembles packages `currfile',
-`filehook', `FiNK', and `inputfile'.
-
-Typesetting the documentation requires the 'nicetext' bundle,
-
- http://ctan.org/pkg/nicetext
-
-`inputtrc' is author-maintained in the sense of LPPL below.
-
-`inputtrc.sty', its documentation `inputtrc.pdf', and the
-latter's source `inputtrc.tex' can be redistributed and/or
-modified under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License;
-either version 1.3c of the License, or any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
-
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-
-We did our best to help you, but there is NO WARRANTY.
-
-Please report bugs, problems, and suggestions via
-
- http://www.contact-ednotes.sty.de.vu
Files old/doc/latex/inputtrc/README.pdf and new/doc/latex/inputtrc/README.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/inputtrc/RELEASE.txt new/doc/latex/inputtrc/RELEASE.txt
--- old/doc/latex/inputtrc/RELEASE.txt 2012-10-13 14:32:15.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/latex/inputtrc/RELEASE.txt 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-r0.3 = v0.3, 2012/10/10,
-corrects \notracingreturns, adds package options for
-immediately issuing \dotracinginputs and \dotracingreturns,
-and adjusts and slightly corrects documentation.
-Source file list generation is modified and includes
-inputtrc.RLS for a release summary.
-____________________________________________________________
-
-r0.2d corrects the TDS version and the date of the earlier
-release, maybe gather.tex and FileList.txt also,
-nothing else. (Date of r0.2c interchanges one `0' and one 1'
-as compared to date of t0.2b)
-UL 2011/01/30
-____________________________________________________________
-r0.2c changes inputtrc.tex (documentation) only,
-using texlinks.sty v0.2 (\urlfoot).
-\baselineskip's are corrected with makedoc.sty v0.41
-UL 2011/01/28
-
-____________________________________________________________
-W.r.t. v0.2, `inputtrc' RELEASE v0.2b (2010/11/28) updates
-
- * LPPL version in README and inputtrc.sty
- * makedoc.cfg
- * inputtrc.pdf with
- * new makedoc.cfg formatting
- * using `readprov.sty' for referring to `inputtrc.sty'
- * mention of the `filehook' package
-
-and adds
-
- * README.pdf (+ README.tex)
- * FileList.txt + gather.tex
-
-UL 2010/11/28
-
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/inputtrc/SrcFILEs.txt new/doc/latex/inputtrc/SrcFILEs.txt
--- old/doc/latex/inputtrc/SrcFILEs.txt 2012-10-13 14:32:15.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/latex/inputtrc/SrcFILEs.txt 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-
- *File List*
-----HERE.--- -- -- -- -- ----
-inputtrc.sty 2012/10/10 v0.3 input tracing (UL)
-inputtrc.tex 2012/10/03 -- documenting inputtrc.sty
-inputtrc.RLS 2012/10/10 r0.3 v0.3 fix, [i], [r], [ir]
--DOC-FMT.--- -- -- -- -- ----
-fifinddo.sty 2012/08/27 v0.6 filtering TeX(t) files by TeX (UL)
- makedoc.sty 2012/08/28 v0.52 TeX input from *.sty (UL)
-niceverb.sty 2012/09/27 v0.5 minimize doc markup (UL)
- makedoc.cfg 2012/07/13 -- documentation settings
- README.tex 2012/03/18 -- make README.pdf
-hypertoc.sty 2011/01/23 v0.1 pretty TOC links (UL)
-texlinks.sty 2012/05/13 v0.6 TeX-related links (UL)
-----LIST.--- -- -- -- -- ----
-myfilist.sty 2012/10/11 v0.6 \listfiles -- mine only (UL)
-readprov.sty 2012/03/20 v0.3b file infos without loading (UL)
-srcfiles.tex 2012/10/11 -- file infos -> SrcFILEs.txt
- ***********
-
- List made at 2012/10/11, 13:38
- from script file srcfiles.tex
-
Files old/doc/latex/inputtrc/inputtrc.pdf and new/doc/latex/inputtrc/inputtrc.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/fnpara.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/fnpara.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/fnpara.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/fnpara.doc.tlpobj 2012-03-12 04:30:06.000000000 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+name fnpara.doc
+category Package
+revision 25607
+shortdesc doc files of fnpara
+relocated 1
+docfiles size=45
+ RELOC/doc/latex/fnpara/fnpara-doc.pdf
+ RELOC/doc/latex/fnpara/fnpara-doc.tex
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/inputtrc.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/inputtrc.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/inputtrc.doc.tlpobj 2012-10-19 04:32:27.000000000 +0200
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/inputtrc.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-name inputtrc.doc
-category Package
-revision 28019
-shortdesc doc files of inputtrc
-relocated 1
-docfiles size=95
- RELOC/doc/latex/inputtrc/README
- RELOC/doc/latex/inputtrc/README.pdf
- RELOC/doc/latex/inputtrc/RELEASE.txt
- RELOC/doc/latex/inputtrc/SrcFILEs.txt
- RELOC/doc/latex/inputtrc/inputtrc.pdf
++++++ inputtrc.doc.tar.xz -> fnpara.tar.xz ++++++
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/inputtrc/README new/doc/latex/inputtrc/README
--- old/doc/latex/inputtrc/README 2012-10-13 14:32:15.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/latex/inputtrc/README 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
- README for the `inputtrc' package
-
- Tracing Which File Loads Which
-
- (C) Uwe Lueck 2012/10/10
-
- http://www.contact-ednotes.sty.de.vu
-
-
-`inputtrc.sty' produces screen/log messages
-`<current> INPUTTING <next>' on LaTeX input commands,
-<current> and <next> being file names.
-The message indents reflect the input nesting level.
-This can be turned on and off, and the "indent unit"
-can be chosen. `RETURNING TO <current>' may be added.
-These messages should help when you otherwise get a screen
-message about some input line number and wonder in which
-file that is.
-
-The implementation somewhat resembles packages `currfile',
-`filehook', `FiNK', and `inputfile'.
-
-Typesetting the documentation requires the 'nicetext' bundle,
-
- http://ctan.org/pkg/nicetext
-
-`inputtrc' is author-maintained in the sense of LPPL below.
-
-`inputtrc.sty', its documentation `inputtrc.pdf', and the
-latter's source `inputtrc.tex' can be redistributed and/or
-modified under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License;
-either version 1.3c of the License, or any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
-
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-
-We did our best to help you, but there is NO WARRANTY.
-
-Please report bugs, problems, and suggestions via
-
- http://www.contact-ednotes.sty.de.vu
Files old/doc/latex/inputtrc/README.pdf and new/doc/latex/inputtrc/README.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/inputtrc/RELEASE.txt new/doc/latex/inputtrc/RELEASE.txt
--- old/doc/latex/inputtrc/RELEASE.txt 2012-10-13 14:32:15.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/latex/inputtrc/RELEASE.txt 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-r0.3 = v0.3, 2012/10/10,
-corrects \notracingreturns, adds package options for
-immediately issuing \dotracinginputs and \dotracingreturns,
-and adjusts and slightly corrects documentation.
-Source file list generation is modified and includes
-inputtrc.RLS for a release summary.
-____________________________________________________________
-
-r0.2d corrects the TDS version and the date of the earlier
-release, maybe gather.tex and FileList.txt also,
-nothing else. (Date of r0.2c interchanges one `0' and one 1'
-as compared to date of t0.2b)
-UL 2011/01/30
-____________________________________________________________
-r0.2c changes inputtrc.tex (documentation) only,
-using texlinks.sty v0.2 (\urlfoot).
-\baselineskip's are corrected with makedoc.sty v0.41
-UL 2011/01/28
-
-____________________________________________________________
-W.r.t. v0.2, `inputtrc' RELEASE v0.2b (2010/11/28) updates
-
- * LPPL version in README and inputtrc.sty
- * makedoc.cfg
- * inputtrc.pdf with
- * new makedoc.cfg formatting
- * using `readprov.sty' for referring to `inputtrc.sty'
- * mention of the `filehook' package
-
-and adds
-
- * README.pdf (+ README.tex)
- * FileList.txt + gather.tex
-
-UL 2010/11/28
-
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/inputtrc/SrcFILEs.txt new/doc/latex/inputtrc/SrcFILEs.txt
--- old/doc/latex/inputtrc/SrcFILEs.txt 2012-10-13 14:32:15.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/latex/inputtrc/SrcFILEs.txt 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-
- *File List*
-----HERE.--- -- -- -- -- ----
-inputtrc.sty 2012/10/10 v0.3 input tracing (UL)
-inputtrc.tex 2012/10/03 -- documenting inputtrc.sty
-inputtrc.RLS 2012/10/10 r0.3 v0.3 fix, [i], [r], [ir]
--DOC-FMT.--- -- -- -- -- ----
-fifinddo.sty 2012/08/27 v0.6 filtering TeX(t) files by TeX (UL)
- makedoc.sty 2012/08/28 v0.52 TeX input from *.sty (UL)
-niceverb.sty 2012/09/27 v0.5 minimize doc markup (UL)
- makedoc.cfg 2012/07/13 -- documentation settings
- README.tex 2012/03/18 -- make README.pdf
-hypertoc.sty 2011/01/23 v0.1 pretty TOC links (UL)
-texlinks.sty 2012/05/13 v0.6 TeX-related links (UL)
-----LIST.--- -- -- -- -- ----
-myfilist.sty 2012/10/11 v0.6 \listfiles -- mine only (UL)
-readprov.sty 2012/03/20 v0.3b file infos without loading (UL)
-srcfiles.tex 2012/10/11 -- file infos -> SrcFILEs.txt
- ***********
-
- List made at 2012/10/11, 13:38
- from script file srcfiles.tex
-
Files old/doc/latex/inputtrc/inputtrc.pdf and new/doc/latex/inputtrc/inputtrc.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tex/latex/fnpara/fnpara.sty new/tex/latex/fnpara/fnpara.sty
--- old/tex/latex/fnpara/fnpara.sty 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tex/latex/fnpara/fnpara.sty 2012-03-11 22:46:32.000000000 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+% FNPARA.STY
+% A LaTeX style to typeset footnotes in run-on paragraphs.
+% See end of this file (after \endinput) for comments.
+%
+% Copyright 1988, 1995, 2012 Chris Rowley, Dominik Wujastyk,
+% and Bradley A. Smith.
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+%
+% The Current Maintainer of this work are the above copyright holders.
+%
+% This work consists of the file fnpara.sty.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% From latex.ltx :
+\long\def\@mpfootnotetext#1{%
+ \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+ \unvbox\@mpfootins
+ \reset@font\footnotesize
+ \hsize\columnwidth
+ \@parboxrestore
+ \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+ {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+ \color@begingroup
+ \setbox0=\hbox{%
+ \@makefntext{%
+ \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox
+ \penalty -10
+ \hskip\footglue
+ }%
+ }%
+ \dp0=0pt \ht0=\fudgefactor\wd0 \box0
+ \color@endgroup}}
+\long\def\@footnotetext#1{\insert\footins{%
+ \reset@font\footnotesize
+ \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+ \splittopskip\footnotesep
+ \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
+ \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+ \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+ \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
+ }%
+ \color@begingroup
+ \setbox0=\hbox{%
+ \@makefntext{%
+ \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox
+ \penalty -10
+ \hskip\footglue
+ }%
+ }%
+ \dp0=0pt \ht0=\fudgefactor\wd0 \box0
+ \color@endgroup}}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%CCCC --- from TeXbook
+\newskip\footglue \footglue=1em plus.3em minus.3em
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Cut down from article.cls :
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{%
+% \parindent 1em%
+% \noindent
+% \hb@xt@1.8em{\hss\@makefnmark}#1
+ \hb@xt@.5em{\hss\@makefnmark}\hskip.5em#1
+}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% From latex.ltx:
+\def\endminipage{%
+ \par
+ \unskip
+ \ifvoid\@mpfootins\else
+ \vskip\skip\@mpfootins
+ \normalcolor
+ \footnoterule
+% \unvbox\@mpfootins
+ \mpmakefootnoteparagraph
+ \fi
+ \global\@minipagefalse %% added 24 May 89
+ \color@endgroup
+ \egroup
+ \expandafter\@iiiparbox\@mpargs{\unvbox\@tempboxa}}
+\def \@makecol {%
+ \ifvoid\footins
+ \setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
+ \else
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox {%
+ \boxmaxdepth \@maxdepth
+ \unvbox \@cclv
+ \vskip \skip\footins
+ \color@begingroup
+ \normalcolor
+ \footnoterule
+% \unvbox \footins
+ \makefootnoteparagraph
+ \color@endgroup
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}%
+ \global \let \@midlist \@empty
+ \@combinefloats
+ \ifvbox\@kludgeins
+ \@makespecialcolbox
+ \else
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox to\@colht {%
+ \@texttop
+ \dimen@ \dp\@outputbox
+ \unvbox \@outputbox
+ \vskip -\dimen@
+ \@textbottom
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \global \maxdepth \@maxdepth
+}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% From TeXbook, p.398 ff., AVOIDING the redefinition of \\ in LaTeX!!
+{\catcode`p=12 \catcode`t=12 \gdef\@ennumber#1pt{#1}}
+
+{\footnotesize \newdimen\footnotebaselineskip
+%CCCC --definitely needed:
+ \global
+ \footnotebaselineskip=\normalbaselineskip}
+
+\dimen0=\footnotebaselineskip \multiply\dimen0 by 1024
+\divide \dimen0 by \columnwidth \multiply\dimen0 by 64
+\xdef\fudgefactor{\expandafter\@ennumber\the\dimen0 }
+
+\def\makefootnoteparagraph{\unvbox\footins \makehboxofhboxes
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\unhbox0 \removehboxes}
+%CCCC ---now we are ready to set the paragraph:
+ \hsize\columnwidth
+ \@parboxrestore
+ \baselineskip=\footnotebaselineskip
+ \noindent
+%CCCC ---this is where the strut is needed:
+ \rule{\z@}{\footnotesep}%
+ \unhbox0\par}
+%
+%
+\def\mpmakefootnoteparagraph{\unvbox\@mpfootins \makehboxofhboxes
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\unhbox0 \removehboxes}
+%CCCC ---now we are ready to set the paragraph:
+ \hsize\columnwidth
+ \@parboxrestore
+ \baselineskip=\footnotebaselineskip
+ \noindent
+%CCCC ---this is where the strut is needed:
+ \rule{\z@}{\footnotesep}%
+ \unhbox0\par}
+\def\makehboxofhboxes{\setbox0=\hbox{}
+ \loop\setbox2=\lastbox \ifhbox2 \setbox0=\hbox{\box2\unhbox0}\repeat}
+\def\removehboxes{\setbox0=\lastbox
+ \ifhbox0{\removehboxes}\unhbox0 \fi}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\endinput
+
+ FNPARA.STY
+ A LaTeX style to typeset footnotes in run-on paragraphs.
+
+History:
+
+A vain attempt at this LaTeX modification was tried in late
+September 1988 by Dominik Wujastyk, and sent to TeXhax and UKTeX
+for comment. Chris Rowley came up with a working
+version a few days later, but it still needs thorough testing.
+
+The Style:
+
+This LaTeX style changes the way LaTeX does footnotes. With this
+style invoked (\documentstyle[fnpara]{article}), footnotes will
+be typeset in a running paragraph, instead of one above another.
+It is suitable for texts such as critical editions, which contain
+many short footnotes.
+
+This is based on the TeX macros described by Knuth in the
+TeXbook, Dirty Tricks, pages 398--400. It is not tested beyond
+some simple examples. In particular, it has not been tested
+properly in connection with even the simplest of environments, nor with
+other floats.
+
+(In fact, ordinary LaTeX footnotes sometimes do not work well
+if they need splitting (e.g. producing blank pages,
+or appearing in shufled form): but these
+problems should not affect this style.
+I --CR-- have sent in a Bug Report about some
+of these problems.)
+
+Be aware of Knuth's note on the limitations of this method of
+doing the job: the TeX stack is used four times per footnote,
+and the stack is limited (TeXbook pp. 300--301). So if you have
+very many footnotes (in the hundreds) and encounter
+ "! TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [... save size ...]"
+errors, you may need to break your text into smaller sections.
+Fortunately, this is very easy to do with LaTeX. And the
+footnote counter can be reset to make the joins seamless.
+
+Chris Rowley
+Dominik Wujastyk
+
+October 3, 1988
+
+---------------------------
+Modified 11/12/95
+Updated with new copies of relevant definitions from base files, and
+added definitions for paragraph footnotes inside minipages
+Bradley Smith - http://www.baysmith.com/
+
+---------------------------
+Modified 10 March 2012
+Updated to be explicitly under the LPPL, per agreement of all authors.
+Web site for Bradley Smith contact.
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/fnpara.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/fnpara.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/fnpara.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/fnpara.tlpobj 2012-03-12 04:30:07.000000000 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+name fnpara
+category Package
+revision 25607
+shortdesc Footnotes in paragraphs.
+relocated 1
+longdesc Typeset footnotes in run-on paragraphs, instead of one above
+longdesc another; this is a re-seating, for the LaTeX environment, of an
+longdesc example in the TeXbook. The same basic code, improved for use
+longdesc in e-TeX-based LaTeX, appears in the comprehensive footnote
+longdesc package footmisc, and superior versions are also available in
+longdesc the manyfoot and bigfoot packages.
+runfiles size=2
+ RELOC/tex/latex/fnpara/fnpara.sty
+catalogue-ctan /macros/latex/contrib/fnpara
+catalogue-date 2012-03-11 01:08:16 +0100
+catalogue-license lppl1.3
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/inputtrc.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/inputtrc.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/inputtrc.doc.tlpobj 2012-10-19 04:32:27.000000000 +0200
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/inputtrc.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-name inputtrc.doc
-category Package
-revision 28019
-shortdesc doc files of inputtrc
-relocated 1
-docfiles size=95
- RELOC/doc/latex/inputtrc/README
- RELOC/doc/latex/inputtrc/README.pdf
- RELOC/doc/latex/inputtrc/RELEASE.txt
- RELOC/doc/latex/inputtrc/SrcFILEs.txt
- RELOC/doc/latex/inputtrc/inputtrc.pdf
++++++ iwhdp.doc.tar.xz -> fp.doc.tar.xz ++++++
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/fp/README new/doc/latex/fp/README
--- old/doc/latex/fp/README 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/latex/fp/README 2006-01-09 01:44:40.000000000 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,459 @@
+fp-package
+
+(c) Michael Mehlich 1994 -- 1999
+contributions by: Denis Girou
+acknowledgment to: Denis Girou, Miroslav Balda, Ricardo Sanchez Carmenes
+
+% Copyright 1994 -- 1999 Michael Mehlich
+% This package can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives at http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+
+(current) e-mail: mmehlich@semdesigns.com; michael@mehlich.com
+
+Fixed point arithmetic for TeX with numbers ranging from
+ -999999999999999999.999999999999999999
+to
+ +999999999999999999.999999999999999999
+
+TODO:
+ - better documentation (it is really bad)
+
+USAGE:
+ - LaTeX2e:
+ \usepackage[<options>]{fp}
+ where the following options are known:
+ nomessages: don't print messages about the functions that are
+ just computed
+ debug: print debug messages (mainly for \FPupn)
+ - LaTeX2.09:
+ include lfp.sty in the document preamble, i.e.
+ \documentstyle[...,lfp,...]{...}
+ - TeX:
+ \input fp.tex
+
+MsDos/Windows Users:
+ It may be necessary to rename some files such that they just have a length of
+ eight characters (plus a three character suffix).
+ The following renaming e.g. works for emtex:
+ Original name Name for emtex
+ defpattern.sty defpaern.sty
+ fp-addons.sty fp-adons.sty
+ fp-random.sty fp-radom.sty
+
+FILES AND THEIR CONTENTS:
+ - readme.fp:
+ this file
+ - fp.sty
+ includes all files
+ - defpattern.sty:
+ only for internal usage
+ - fp-basic.sty:
+ The following macros are public ones to be used in the document:
+ %controlling messages
+ \FPmessagestrue % print standard FP-messages (default)
+ \FPmessagesfalse % suppress standard FP-messages
+ \FPdebugtrue % print debug messages (mainly for upn)
+ \FPdebugfalse % suppress debug messages (default)
+ %introduction of new values
+ \FPset#1#2 % #1 := #2 (#1 may be macro or string)
+ %print values
+ \FPprint#1 % prints #1 (#1 may be macro or string)
+ %binary operations
+ \FPadd#1#2#3 % #1 := #2+#3
+ \FPdiv#1#2#3 % #1 := #2/#3
+ \FPmul#1#2#3 % #1 := #2*#3
+ \FPsub#1#2#3 % #1 := #2-#3
+ %unary operations
+ \FPabs#1#2 % #1 := abs(#2)
+ \FPneg#1#2 % #1 := -#2
+ %binary relations
+ \FPiflt#1#2...\else...\fi % #1 < #2 ?
+ \FPifeq#1#2...\else...\fi % #1 = #2 ?
+ \FPifgt#1#2...\else...\fi % #1 > #2 ?
+ %unary relations
+ \FPifneg#1 ...\else...\fi % #1 < 0 ?
+ \FPifpos#1 ...\else...\fi % #1 >= 0 ?
+ \FPifzero#1...\else...\fi % #1 = 0 ?
+ \FPifint#1 ...\else...\fi % #1 is integer ?
+ %repeat last test
+ \ifFPtest ...\else...\fi % repeat last test
+ - fp-addons.sty
+ The following macros are public ones to be used in the document:
+ %binary operations
+ \FPmin#1#2#3 % #1 = min(#2,#3)
+ \FPmax#1#2#3 % #1 = max(#2,#3)
+ - fp-eqn.sty (No warranty on correctness and especially on numerical problems!)
+ The following macros are public ones to be used in the document:
+ \FPlsolve#1#2#3
+ % #1 := x with #2*x+#3=0
+ \FPqsolve#1#2#3#4#5
+ % #1,#2 := x with #3*x^2+#4*x+#5 = 0
+ \FPcsolve#1#2#3#4#5#6#7
+ % #1,#2,#3 := x with #4*x^3+#5*x^2+#6*x+#7 = 0
+ \FPqqsolve#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8#9
+ % #1,#2,#3,#4 := x with #5*x^4+#6*x^3+#7*x^2+#8*x+#9 = 0
+ The resulting solutions are all real values. If there do not
+ exist as much solutions you get a warning message and some
+ other solutions occur several times in the solution vector.
+ - fp-exp.sty
+ The following macros are public ones to be used in the document:
+ \FPe % 2.718281828459045235
+ \FPexp#1#2 % #1 := e^(#2)
+ \FPln#1#2 % #1 := ln(#2)
+ \FPpow#1#2#3 % #1 := (#2)^(#3)
+ \FProot#1#2#3 % #1 := (#2)^(1/#3)
+ - fp-random.sty
+ The following macros are public ones to be used in the document:
+ \FPseed=#1 % set seed counter for random number generation
+ \FPrandom#1 % #1 := a random number between 0 and 1
+ - fp-pas.sty
+ The following macros are public ones to be used in the document:
+ \FPpascal#1#2 % #1 := #2-th line of the pascal triangle
+ - fp-snap.sty:
+ The following macros are public ones to be used in the document:
+ \FPround#1#2#3 % #1 := #2 rounded to #3 digits after '.'
+ \FPtrunc#1#2#3 % #1 := #2 truncated to #3 digits after '.'
+ \FPclip#1#2 % #1 := #2 with all unnecessary 0's removed
+ - fp-trigo.sty:
+ The following macros are public ones to be used in the document:
+ \FPpi % 3.141592653589793238
+ \FPsin#1#2 % #1 := sin(#2)
+ \FPcos#1#2 % #1 := cos(#2)
+ \FPsincos#1#2#3 % #1 := sin(#3), #2 := cos(#3)
+ \FPtan#1#2 % #1 := tan(#2)
+ \FPcot#1#2 % #1 := cot(#2)
+ \FPtancot#1#2#3 % #1 := tan(#3), #2 := cot(#3)
+ \FParcsin#1#2 % #1 := arcsin(#2)
+ \FParccos#1#2 % #1 := arccos(#2)
+ \FParcsincos#1#2#3 % #1 := arcsin(#3), #2 := arccos(#3)
+ \FParctan#1#2 % #1 := arctan(#2)
+ \FParccot#1#2 % #1 := arccot(#2)
+ \FParctancot#1#2#3 % #1 := arctan(#3), #2 := arccot(#3)
+ - fp-upn.sty:
+ The following macros are public ones to be used in the document:
+ \FPupn#1#2 % #1 := eval(#2) where eval evaluates the
+ upn-expression #2
+ Known operations are:
+ +,add,-,sub,*,mul,/,div,abs,neg,min,max,
+ round,trunc,clip,e,exp,ln,pow,root,pi,sin,cos,
+ sincos,tan,cot,tancot,arcsin,arccos,arcsincos,
+ arctan,arccot,arctancot,pop,swap,copy
+ where
+ pop removes the top element
+ swap exchanges the first two elements
+ copy copies the top element
+ Example 1:
+ The macro call
+ \FPupn\result{17 2.5 + 17.5 - 2 1 + * 2 swap /}
+ is equivalent to
+ \result := ((17.5 - (17 + 2.5)) * (2 + 1)) / 2
+ and evaluates to
+ \def\result{-3.000000000000000000}
+ Afterwards the macro call
+ \FPupn\result{\result{} -1 * 0.2 + sin 2 round}
+ ^^ the "{}" is necessary!
+ is equivalent to
+ \result := round_2(sin((\result * -1) + 0.2))
+ and evaluates to
+ \def\result{-0.06}
+ Example 2:
+ As "result" is an abbreviation of "\result{}" you may
+ write
+ \FPupn{result}{17 2.5 + 17.5 - 2 1 + * 2 swap /}
+ and
+ \FPupn{result}{result -1 * 0.2 + sin 2 round}
+ instead leading to the same results.
+ This is even true for other macro names using e.g. "x" for "\x{}"
+ and so on. But be careful with it. We may introduce new constants
+ in further versions overwriting these abbreviations.
+ - fp-eval.sty:
+ The following macros are public ones to be used in the document:
+ \FPeval#1#2 % #1 := eval(#2) where eval evaluates the
+ expression #2
+ ATTENTION: Do not use macro names with \. for its own
+ Use only the name or the macro surrounded by (, and ) instead,
+ i.e. do not write "\value{}" but "value" or "(\value)".
+ This is needed to avoid problems with a prefix "-" of numbers.
+ (I do not intend to write a more complex parsing routine in future.
+ But if you do so, just send it to me.
+ )
+ Known infix operations are
+ +, -, *, /, ^ for add, sub, mul, div, pow
+ Each other operation is a prefix one that needs
+ a (comma or colon seperated) list of subexpressions.
+ Exception: The unary prefix operation - is not known!
+ (Use the function neg instead.)
+ Example 1:
+ With
+ \edef\result{11}
+ and
+ \FPeval\result{round(root(2,sin(result + 2.5)):2)}
+ or
+ \FPeval{result}{round(root(2,sin(result + 2.5)):2)}
+ \result becomes the value 0.90
+ Example 2:
+ \FPeval\result{clip(2*3+5*6)} results to 36
+ \FPeval\result{clip(2*(3+5)*6)} results to 96
+
+KNOWN BUGS:
+ - does not work with multido.sty/multido.tex
+ Reason:
+ multido uses the same macro names \FPadd and \FPsub
+ Recommended Solution:
+ Patch multido.tex, i.e. apply the following substitutions:
+ FPadd -> mdo@FPadd
+ FPsub -> mdo@FPsub
+
+ - incompatibility with french style of babel
+ this only affects macros using the colon (:)
+ Recommended Solution:
+ Load the fp-package before babel with french style
+ Other Possible Solution:
+ Use \catcode`\:=12 after loading babel with french style
+
+ - others:
+ Currently not known, but, though we do not, we could give
+ a warranty of their existence ...
+
+HISTORY:
+ Date By File New Version
+
+ Oct. 21, 1996 Michael Mehlich fp-upn.sty V2.1c
+ better debug messages (especially giving results of one step computations)
+
+ May. 13, 1996 Michael Mehlich fp-basic.sty V1.2d
+ \newcount and \countdef have interfered each other
+ when the first newcount uses a counter number less
+ than 60, the result has been wrong results when using
+ the package with plain tex (a problem that has been
+ reported by Ricardo Sanchez Carmenes)
+
+ May. 13, 1996 Michael Mehlich all files -
+ problems with unwanted spaces removed
+ (bug reported by Ricardo Sanchez Carmenes)
+
+ May. 28, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-basic.sty V1.2c
+ modified \FPset and added \FPprint
+
+ Apr. 27, 1995 Michael Mehliche fp-trigo.sty V0.9e
+ incorrect result of sine for 3/2pi fixed
+ (bug reported by Miroslav Balda)
+
+ Apr. 14, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-trigo.sty V0.9d
+ infinite loop in computing sine and cosine fixed
+ (bug reported by Miroslav Balda)
+
+ Apr. 05, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-snap.sty V1.0a
+ rounding bug in FPround fixed
+ (bug reported by Miroslav Balda)
+
+ Apr. 04, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp.tex -
+ lfp.sty -
+ a redefinition of \loop..\repeat added not to get into
+ trouble with its behaviour within my macros
+ (bug reported by Miroslav Balda)
+
+ Apr. 04, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-basic.sty V1.2b
+ added a value introduction command FPset
+
+ Apr. 03, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-eqn.sty V0.4
+ added solution algorithms for cubic and 4-th degree equations
+
+ Apr. 03, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-trigo.sty V0.9c
+ added some % at end of lines not to introduce unwanted spaces
+ removed some debug informations that have accidently been left in
+
+ Apr. 03, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-exp.sty V0.7e
+ added some % at end of lines not to introduce unwanted spaces
+
+ Apr. 03, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-upn.sty V2.1b
+ fp-eval.sty V0.9a
+ added support of sgn
+
+ Apr. 03, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-basic.sty V1.2a
+ added new command \FPsgn
+
+ Apr. 02, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-exp.sty V0.7d
+ bug corrected, power of 0 by f # 0 now is 0 and no longer
+ leads to an error message
+
+ Apr. 02, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp.sty V0.8
+ added fp-eval.sty to list of required packages
+
+ Apr. 02, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-upn.sty V2.1a
+ some modifications to work with fp-eval.sty
+
+ Apr. 02, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-eval.sty V0.9
+ inital version
+
+ Mar. 15, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp.sty V0.7a
+ added fp-addons.sty, fp-eqn.sty to list of required packages
+
+ Mar. 15, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-eqn.sty V0.2
+ initial version
+
+ Mar. 15, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-exp.sty V0.7c
+ bug corrected, root of 0 now is 0 and no longer leads to
+ an error message
+
+ Mar. 15, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-upn.sty V2.1
+ allow macros to be given without \ and {} surrounding
+ support of min, max added
+
+ Mar. 15, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-addons.sty V0.1
+ initial version
+
+ Feb. 23, 1995 Denis Girou fp-random.sty V1.0a
+ more elaborated comments
+
+ Feb. 21, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-trigo.sty V0.9b
+ corrected overflow test for arcsin and arccos
+
+ Feb. 18, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-upn.sty V2.0
+ added debug messages for fp-upn.sty
+ (recommended by Denis Girou)
+
+ Feb. 18, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp.sty V0.7
+ added fp-random.sty to list of required packages
+
+ Feb. 18, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-basic.sty V1.2
+ printing fp-messages is conditional only (default: true)
+ introduced macro for printing debug messages (default: do not print)
+ (recommmended by Denis Girou)
+
+ Feb. 18, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-exp.sty V0.7c
+ corrected bugs in \FP@pow and \FP@root writing messages to
+ ordinary text
+ (reported by Denis Girou)
+
+ Feb. 17, 1995 Denis Girou fp-random.sty V1.0
+ introduced
+
+ Feb. 17, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-basic.sty V1.1f
+ corrected \FP@strip introduced in version V1.1e
+ as it has to but did not hande + and -
+
+ Feb. 17, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-basic.sty V1.1e
+ corrected \FP@strip introduced in version V1.1d
+ as it has to but did not hande empty parameters
+
+ Feb. 17, 1995 Michael Mehlich fp-basic.sty V1.1d
+ bug in scanning numbers by \FP@readvalue in connection
+ with number-macros of \FPupn corrected
+ (thanks for Denis Girou reporting this bug)
+
+ Nov. 19, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp.sty V0.6
+ package date changed
+
+ Nov. 19, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-basic.sty V1.1c
+ bug in \FP@correctintcounter corrected
+
+ Nov. 19, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-upn.sty V1.1
+ handling of arctan, arccot, arctancot added
+
+ Nov. 19, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-trigo.sty V0.9a
+ \FParctan, \FParccot, \FParctancot added
+
+ Oct. 27, 1994 Michael Mehlich lfp.sty -
+ introduced
+
+ Oct. 27, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp.tex -
+ introduced
+
+ Oct. 15, 1994 Michael Mehlich readme.fp -
+ this history changed for better readability
+
+ Oct. 15, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-exp.sty V0.7b
+ subtraction bug in \FP@@exp corrected
+
+ Oct. 15, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-basic.sty V1.1b
+ subtraction in \FP@counttimes changed
+
+ Oct. 15, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-trigo.sty V0.7b
+ error message, if \FP@modtwopi does not lead to correct result
+ (this shouldn't be possible)
+ subtraction in \FP@@cos corrected
+
+ Oct. 12, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp.sty V0.5b
+ prevent files included from sending messages
+
+ Oct. 12, 1994 Michael Mehlich readme.fp -
+ changed entry for defpattern.sty in this history to reflect
+ original source for defpattern.sty
+
+ Oct. 12, 1994 Michael Mehlich defpattern.sty -
+ source notice in message corrected
+
+ Oct. 12, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-exp.sty -
+ start message for \FPpow changed
+
+ Oct. 12, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-trigo.sty -
+ unnecessary \typeout removed
+
+ Oct. 3, 1994 Michael Mehlich, fp.sty V0.5
+ additional styles included by fp.sty
+
+ Oct. 3, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-upn.sty V1.0
+ first version
+
+ Oct. 3, 1994 Michael Mehlich defpattern.sty -
+ modification of the \howto-macro in TeX and TUG NEWS
+ from an article by Alan Jeffrey
+ no version number, no copyright (public domain)
+ TeX and TUG News 2(2) writes in the section "Mission Statement":
+ "The entire contents of this newsletter are being placed in
+ the public domain."
+
+ Oct. 3, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-basic.sty V1.1
+ bug in \FPadd corrected
+
+ Aug. 29, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp.sty V0.3
+ additional styles included by fp.sty
+
+ Aug. 29, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-trigo.sty V0.7
+ first version
+
+ Aug. 29, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-pas.sty V1.0
+ first version
+
+ Aug. 29, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-exp.sty V0.7
+ first version
+
+ Aug. 12, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp.sty V0.2
+ first version
+
+ Aug. 10, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-snap.sty V1.0
+ first version
+
+ Apr. 20, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-basic.sty V1.0
+ \FPabs added
+
+ Apr. 12, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-basic.sty V0.99
+ division algorithm added
+
+ Feb. 03, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-basic.sty V0.8
+ all macros are completely rewritten to be able to use an increased
+ range of numbers
+
+ Jan. 18, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-basic.sty V0.2
+ bug in \FP@store corrected
+
+ Jan. 17, 1994 Michael Mehlich fp-basic.sty V0.1
+ the file realcalc.tex V1.0, (C) Frank Buchholz has been renamed to
+ fp-basic.sty V0.1 with all macros renamed, \@trunc removed
+
+COPYING:
+ - Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+ documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
+ provided that the above copyright notice, the above history with your
+ modifications added, and this permission notice appear in all copies
+ and modified versions.
+ - The copyright holder disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability and
+ fitness, in no event shall the copyright holder be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages whatsoever
+ resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of
+ contract, negligence or other tortious action, arising out of or in
+ connection with the use or performance of this software.
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/fp/fp.tex new/doc/latex/fp/fp.tex
--- old/doc/latex/fp/fp.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/latex/fp/fp.tex 2006-01-09 01:44:40.000000000 +0100
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+%load the fp-package for TeX
+\chardef\FPcatamp=\the\catcode`\@
+\catcode`@=11
+
+\def\NeedsTeXFormat#1{}
+\def\ProvidesPackage#1[#2]{}
+\def\DeclareOption#1#2{}
+\let\ProcessOptions\relax
+
+%the for-loop of latex2e
+\def\@nnil{\@nil}
+\def\@empty{}
+\def\@fornoop#1\@@#2#3{}
+
+\def\@for#1:=#2\do#3{\edef\@fortmp{#2}\ifx\@fortmp\@empty \else
+ \expandafter\@forloop#2,\@nil,\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}
+
+\def\@forloop#1,#2,#3\@@#4#5{\def#4{#1}\ifx #4\@nnil \else
+ #5\def#4{#2}\ifx #4\@nnil \else#5\@iforloop #3\@@#4{#5}\fi\fi}
+
+\def\@iforloop#1,#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil
+ \let\@nextwhile\@fornoop \else
+ #4\relax\let\@nextwhile\@iforloop\fi\@nextwhile#2\@@#3{#4}}
+
+\edef\FP@loadedfiles{fp.tex}
+
+\def\FP@alreadyloaded#1{}
+\def\FP@notyetloaded#1{
+ \edef\FP@loadedfiles{\FP@loadedfiles,#1}
+ \input #1.sty
+}
+\def\RequirePackage#1{%
+ \let\FP@in@\FP@notyetloaded%
+ \edef\@tempb{#1}%
+ \@for\@tempa:=\FP@loadedfiles\do{%
+ \ifx\@tempa\@tempb%
+ \let\FP@in@\FP@alreadyloaded%
+ \fi%
+ }%
+ \FP@in@{#1}%
+}
+
+\def\loop#1\repeat{\def\iterate{#1\relax\expandafter\iterate\fi}%
+ \iterate \let\iterate\relax}
+\let\repeat=\fi
+
+\RequirePackage{fp}
+
+\catcode`\@=\FPcatamp
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/iwhdp/README new/doc/latex/iwhdp/README
--- old/doc/latex/iwhdp/README 2012-09-11 00:52:36.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/latex/iwhdp/README 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-iwhdp class file
-================
-This document class is for creating discussion papers of the
-Halle Institute for Economic Research (IWH) in Halle/Germany.
-
--------------------------
-Version: 0.30
-This Version: 2012-09-10
-
-by Wilfried Ehrenfeld
-iwhdp(at)gmx(dot)de
--------------------------
-
-The package contains 7 files:
-- this README
-- the class file itself (iwhdp.cls)
-- a short description in german (iwhdp_Manual.pdf, iwhdp_Manual.tex, iwhdp_Manual.bib)
-- a document template (iwhdp_paper.tex, iwhdp_paper.bib)
-
-License
--------
-Copyright 2010-2012 Wilfried Ehrenfeld.
-This package is author-maintained.
-Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this software
-under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3:
-http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
-
-
-Happy TeXing!
-
-Wilfried Ehrenfeld
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_Manual.bib new/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_Manual.bib
--- old/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_Manual.bib 2011-12-08 00:04:48.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_Manual.bib 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
-% This file was created with JabRef 2.6.
-% Encoding: ISO8859_15
-
-@BOOK{demmig2004,
- author = {Thomas Demmig},
- title = {Jetzt lerne ich \LaTeX{}2$_\epsilon$},
- year = {2004},
- publisher = {Pearson Education},
- url = {ftp://ftp.ctan.org/tex-archive/digests/dtk/book_reviews/dtk_jetztlerne.pdf}
-}
-
-@ARTICLE{Ehrenfeld2011iwhdp,
- author = {Wilfried Ehrenfeld},
- title = {Die Dokumentenklasse iwhdp},
- journal = {Die TeXnische Komödie},
- year = {2011},
- volume = {23},
- number = {2},
- pages = {48--54},
- keywords = {Ehrenfeld},
- owner = {wed},
- timestamp = {2011-07-01},
- url = {http://www.iwh-halle.de/e/Abteil/STWA/wed/Ehrenfeld%20(2011)%20Die%20Dokumentenklasse%20iwhdp.pdf}
-}
-
-@ARTICLE{Ehrenfeld2010LaTeX,
- author = {Wilfried Ehrenfeld},
- title = {Die \LaTeX -Vorlage für IWH-Diskussionspapiere},
- journal = {Die TeXnische Komödie},
- year = {2010},
- volume = {22},
- number = {2},
- pages = {43--47},
- keywords = {Ehrenfeld},
- owner = {wed},
- timestamp = {2011-03-09},
- url = {http://www.iwh-halle.de/e/Abteil/STWA/wed/Ehrenfeld%20(2010)%20Die%20LaTeX-Vorlage%20f%C3%BCr%20IWH%20Diskussionspapiere.pdf}
-}
-
-@ARTICLE{Hagen1,
- author = {Manuela Jürgens},
- title = {\LaTeX{} - eine Enführung und ein bißchen mehr...},
- journal = {http://www.fernuni-hagen.de/zmi/katalog/A026.shtml},
- year = {2000},
- owner = {Wilfried},
- timestamp = {2010.02.07}
-}
-
-@ARTICLE{Hagen2,
- author = {Manuela Jürgens},
- title = {\LaTeX{} - Fortgeschrittene Anwendungen},
- journal = {http://www.fernuni-hagen.de/zmi/katalog/A027.shtml},
- year = {1995},
- owner = {Wilfried},
- timestamp = {2010.02.07}
-}
-
-@BOOK{schlager2005,
- author = {Petra Schlager and Manfred Thibud},
- title = {Wissenschaftlich mit \LaTeX{} arbeiten},
- year = {2005},
- publisher = {Pearson Studium}
-}
-
Files old/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_Manual.pdf and new/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_Manual.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_Manual.tex new/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_Manual.tex
--- old/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_Manual.tex 2012-09-11 00:52:36.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_Manual.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,414 +0,0 @@
-%=====================================================%
-% IWH DISKUSSIONSPAPIER README %
-% Wilfried Ehrenfeld %
-%=====================================================%
-\documentclass[german, biber]{iwhdp}
-\bibliography{iwhdp_Manual}
-\begin{document}
-%-----------------------------------------------------%
-\title{IWH-Diskussionspapiere - Benutzeranweisung für die \LaTeX-Dokumentenklasse \texttt{iwhdp}}
-\titlealt{IWH Discussion Papers - The \texttt{iwhdp} User Guide}
-%
-\author{Wilfried Ehrenfeld}
-\department{Abteilung Strukturökonomik}
-\tel{+49\,(0)\,345 7753-832}
-\email{wilfried.ehrenfeld@iwh-halle.de}
-%
-\dpnumber{\TeX{} \iwhdpversion}
-%
-\dpabstract{Dieses Manual beschreibt die \LaTeX-Vorlage für IWH-Diskussionspapiere.}
-\dpabstractalt{This manual outlines the \LaTeX{} template for IWH discussion papers.}
-%
-\keywords{IWH, \LaTeX, Vorlage, iwhdp}
-\keywordsalt{IWH, \LaTeX, template, iwhdp}
-%
-\jel{Z0}
-%-----------------------------------------------------%
-\makeiwhtitle
-%-----------------------------------------------------%
-\section{Benutzung der Vorlage}
-%
-\subsection{Grundsätzliches}
-Für Diskussionspapiere des IWH habe ich die Dokumentenklasse \texttt{iwhdp} geschaffen,
-die bisher jedem Mitarbeiter am IWH frei zur Verfügung steht.
-Die aktuelle Version kann von
-\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/iwhdp}
-% \url{http://www.iwh-halle.de/e/Abteil/STWA/wed/pers.htm}
-bezogen werden. %
-%\footnote{Die jeweils letzte "`größere"' Release steht auf dem CTAN zur Verfügung:\\
-% \url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/iwhdp}.}
-Von der Verwendung alter Versionen wird ausdrücklich abgeraten.
-
-Die Klasse wird mit
-\verb+\documentclass[+\emph{optionale Parameter}\verb+]{iwhdp}+
-aufgerufen.
-Dazu muss die Datei \texttt{iwhdp.cls} im Arbeitsverzeichnis liegen.
-Die Dokumentenklasse besitzt optionale Parameter für
-die Sprache des Papiers sowie für den Umgang mit dem Literaturverzeichnis.
-
-
-\subsection{Optionale Parameter}
-%
-Optionale Parameter für die \textit{Sprache} des Papiers sind:
-%
-\begin{itemize}
-\item \emph{german} für deutsche Diskussionspapiere
-\item \emph{english} für englische Diskussionspapiere
-\end{itemize}
-Die Standardeinstellung (keine optionalen Parameter) ist \emph{german}.
-
-
-Optionale Parameter für die \textit{Literaturverwaltung} sind:
-%
-\begin{itemize}
-\item \emph{harvard} stellt Zitierbefehle zur Verfügung, welche zum \texttt{harvard}-Paket kompatibel sind (\emph{Beta-Version}).
-\item \emph{nobib} schaltet die automatische Literaturverwaltung ganz aus.
-Statt dessen wird die Hilfs-Umgebung \texttt{iwh\_ref} zur Verfügung gestellt.\\
-Diese kann wie folgt benutzt werden:\\
-\verb+\makebib% 'Literatur' bzw. 'References' ausgeben+\\
-\verb+\begin{iwh_ref}% Umgebung für Literatur initialisieren+\\
-\verb+\item+ \emph{...eine Quellenangabe}\\
-\verb+\end{iwh_ref}% Umgebung beenden+\\
-\end{itemize}
-
-Weiter gibt es die Option \textit{biber} welche das intern verwendete Backend für die Literaturverwaltung von BibTeX bzw. BibTeX8 auf biber umschaltet.
-
-Für die Vorbereitung von Diskussionspapieren zu Konferenz-Einreichungen wurde die \emph{conference} Option implementiert.
-% requested by Phillip - 2011-05-19 + 2011-12-06
-Wird diese gesetzt, so werden die IWH-typischen Bestandteile des Diskussionspapiers nicht ausgegeben.
-Diese sind: Datum und Nummer auf der Titelseite, Disclaimer auf der zweiten Seite, die dritte Seite in Alternativsprache sowie die IWH-spezifischen Kopf- und Fußzeile im Text.
-
-% Neu: 2012-01-27
-Die \emph{draft} Option ist für die Konvertierung des Dokumentes zu einer Textdatei oder letztendlich zu Word gedacht, um beispielsweise das Papier zum Korrekturlesen im Word-Format weiterzugeben.
-Die Option bewirkt folgendes:
-Keine Grafiken, kein Deckblatt, keine Kopf- und Fußzeilen, keine Seitannummern, Silbentrennung aus.
-Die Konvertierung könnte dann beispielsweise mit \texttt{pdftotext} aus dem \texttt{xpdf}-Paket erfolgen.
-
-% Für Ingrid Dede
-%Schließlich gibt es die Option \textit{issn} die dafür sorgt, dass auf der zweiten Seite die ISSN-Nummer für IWH-Diskussionspapiere ausgibt.
-%Diese wird für die Druckfassung des Papiers benötigt, nicht aber für die im Internet veröffentlichte pdf-Version.
-%Um der Abteilung Öffentlichkeitsarbeit einen Gefallen zu tun wäre es wünschenswert zwei Versionen des Papiers abzugeben:
-%Eine Version mit ISSN, eine ohne.
-
-
-
-
-\section{Typischer Aufbau eines Dokumentes}
-%
-Die folgenden Erläuterungen erfolgen anhand der Vorlagedatei \texttt{iwhdp\_paper.tex}.
-Die Benutzung dieser Vorlage als Grundlage für eigene Diskussionspapier wird empfohlen.\\
-Das Dokument beginnt mit der Deklarartion der Klasse:
-
-\verb+\documentclass[german]{iwhdp}+
-
-Dies wird also ein deutsches Diskussionspapier.
-Danach folgt die Angabe der Literaturdatenbank:
-
-\verb+\bibliography{iwhdp_paper.bib}+
-
-Die Literaturdatenbank hat also den Namen \texttt{iwhdp\_paper.bib} und steht im Projektverzeichnis, also im selben Verzeichnis wie \texttt{iwhdp\_paper.tex}.
-
-
-Das Dokument wird nun mit
-\verb+\begin{document}+
-initialisiert.
-
-
-Als Erstes sollte der Titel des Papiers in der Sprache des Papiers (\texttt{title}) und in Alternativsprache (\texttt{titlealt}) angegeben werden:
-
-\verb|\title{Die \LaTeX-Vorlage für IWH-Diskussionspapiere}|\\
-\verb|\titlealt{The \LaTeX{} template for IWH discussion papers}|
-
-
-Für \texttt{title} ist es auch möglich, mittels optionalen Parameter den Titel für die dritte Seite des Papiers gesondert anzugeben um dort etwa individuelle Zeilenumbrüche zu verwenden.\\
-
-\verb|\title[Die \LaTeX-Vorlage\\für\\IWH-Diskussionspapiere]%|\\
-\verb| {Die \LaTeX-Vorlage für IWH-Diskussionspapiere}|
-
-
-Nun folgen die bibliographischen Angaben für den/die Autoren:
-
-\verb|\author{Wilfried Ehrenfeld}|\\
-\verb|\department{Abteilung Strukturökonomik}|\\
-% Bisher
-%\verb|\tel{+49\,(0)\,345 7753-832}|\\
-% Neu: 2012-01-17 Auf Forderung von Fr. S. Müller:
-\verb|\tel{+49~345~7753\,832}|\\
-\verb|\email{wilfried.ehrenfeld@iwh-halle.de}|
-
-Fr. Müller vom Bereich Öffentlichkeitsarbeit fordert die Mitarbeiter an dieser Stelle auf, das Format der Telefonnummer zu beachten.
-
-
-Die Parameter für den (ersten) Koautor heißen analog:\\%
-\texttt{cauthor, cdepartment, ctel und cemail}.\\
-Für den zweiten Koautor:\\%
-\texttt{ccauthor, ccdepartment, cctel und ccemail}.\\
-Und schließlich für den dritten Koautor:\\%
-\texttt{cccauthor, cccdepartment, ccctel und cccemail}.\\
-Insgesamt können also vier Autoren erfasst werden.
-
-
-Sämtliche Angaben für die Autoren sind bis auf den Namen des ersten Autoren \emph{optional}.
-Falls sie nicht benötigt werden, können Sie aus dem Papier-Quelltext entfernt werden.
-Alternativ dazu besteht die Möglichkeit, die Angaben für einen Koautor blockweise komplett stillzulegen.
-Dazu trägt man für den Namen des Koautors (\texttt{cauthor, ccauthor, cccauthor}) einfach \texttt{NN} ein.
-
-
-Als nächstes besteht die Möglichkeit den Publikationsmonat des Papiers anzugeben.
-Dies ist aber nur dann nötig, falls dieser vom aktuellen Monat abweicht.
-Dazu trägt man das gewünschte Datum im Zahlenformat
-\verb|\dpdate{|\emph{Monat}\verb|}{|\emph{Jahr}\verb|}| ein.
-\verb|\dpdate{03}{2010}| bezeichnet also den März 2010.
-
-
-Die Nummer des Diskussionspapier wird mit \verb|\dpnumber{|\emph{Nummer}\verb|}| angegeben.
-Diese Nummer wird nach erfolgter Zuteilung durch Fr. Dede hier eingetragen.
-
-
-IWH-Diskussionspapiere werden prinzipiell entweder in Deutsch oder in Englisch geschrieben.
-Ein Merkmal der Diskussionspapiere ist die Existenz einer doppelten dritten Seite.
-Dies führt dazu, dass Angaben wie Zusammenfassungen, Stichwörter und Titelfußnoten jeweils
-in der Sprache des Papiers (hier: deutsch) angegeben werden müssen und zusätzlich in der
-\emph{Alternativsprache} (hier also englisch).
-
-
-Deshalb folgen nun die Zusammenfassung und der Abstract des Papiers
-zuerst in der Sprache des Papiers:
-\verb|\dpabstract{|\emph{Text der Zusammenfassung}\verb|}|,
-danach in der Alternativsprache:
-\verb|\dpabstractalt{|\emph{Text des Abstracts}\verb|}|.
-Bei einem deutschen Text ist also \texttt{dpabstract} in Deutsch zu verfassen
-und \texttt{dpabstractalt} in Englisch - und umgekehrt.
-
-
-Analog hierzu werden die Schlagwörter mit \verb|\keywords{|\emph{Schlagwörter}\verb|}| in der Sprache des Papers angegeben.
-Die einzelnen Schlagwörter sind mit je einem Komma zu trennen.
-In der Alternativsprache werden diese mit \verb|\keywordsalt{|\emph{Keywords}\verb|}| angegeben.
-
-
-Die JEL-Klassifikation wird mit \verb|\jel{|\emph{Klasse}\verb|}| eingetragen.
-Mehrere Klassen sollten mit je einem Komma getrennt werden.
-
-
-Als letzte bibliographische Daten können nun noch die Titelfußnoten angelegt werden.
-Anwendungsbeispiele sind Hinweise (Drittmittelförderung) oder Danksagungen.
-In der Sprache des Papiers werden diese mit \verb|\thanks{|\emph{Dankeschön!}\verb|}| verfasst,
-in der Alternativsprache mit \verb|\thanksalt{|\emph{Thanks!}\verb|}|.
-
-
-Der IWH-spezifische Vorspann wird nun mit
-\verb+\makeiwhtitle+
-ausgegeben.
-Zum Entwickeln der Papiere kann man diesen Befehl gut mit einem "`\texttt{\%}"' vor diesem Befehl auskommentieren.
-
-
-Nun folgt der Text des Diskussionspapiers, beispielsweise beginnend mit\\
-\verb+\section{Einführung}+.
-
-
-Das Papier endet mit dem Literaturverzeichnis.
-Dazu kann mit
-\verb+\clearpage+
-eine neue Seite begonnen werden.
-Das Literaturverzeichnis wird mit
-\verb+\makebib+
-ausgegeben.
-Das Dokument endet mit
-\verb+\end{document}+.
-
-
-Der Aufbau eines typisches Diskussionspapiers sieht dann ungefähr so aus:
-
-%
-%%
-%%%
-\newpage
-{\small \setstretch{1.05}
-\begin{verbatim}
-%=====================================================%
-% IWH DISKUSSIONSPAPIER %
-% Vorlage: Wilfried Ehrenfeld (2012-01) %
-%=====================================================%
-\documentclass[german, biber]{iwhdp}
-\bibliography{iwhdp_paper.bib}
-\begin{document}
-%-----------------------------------------------------%
-\title{Die \LaTeX-Vorlage für IWH-Diskussionspapiere}
-\titlealt{The \LaTeX{} template for IWH discussion papers}
-%
-\author{Wilfried Ehrenfeld}
-\department{Abteilung Strukturökonomik}
-\tel{+49~345~7753\,832}
-\email{wilfried.ehrenfeld@iwh-halle.de}
-%
-%\cauthor{}
-%\cdepartment{}
-%\ctel{}
-%\cemail{}
-%
-%\dpdate{05}{1984}% {Monat}{Jahr} - Nur nötig, wenn abeichend.
-%\dpnumber{1}% Nach Zuteilung aktivieren und eintragen.
-%
-\dpabstract{Dies ist die \LaTeX-Vorlage für IWH-Diskussionspapiere.}
-\dpabstractalt{This is the \LaTeX{} template for IWH discussion papers.}
-%
-\keywords{IWH, \LaTeX, Vorlage, iwhdp}
-\keywordsalt{IWH, \LaTeX, template, iwhdp}
-%
-\jel{Z0}
-%
-%\thanks{Danke.}
-%\thanksalt{Thanks.}
-%-----------------------------------------------------%
-\makeiwhtitle
-%-----------------------------------------------------%
-\section{Einführung}
-Im Anfang schuf Gott Himmel und Erde.
-%-----------------------------------------------------%
-\clearpage \makebib
-\end{document}
-% EOF iwhdp_paper.tex
-\end{verbatim}
-}%Gruppe
-\newpage
-%%%
-%%
-%
-
-\section{Zitierstil}
-%
-Die Vorlage benutzt für die Erstellung von Zitaten das \texttt{biblatex}-Paket%
-\footnote{\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/exptl/biblatex/}.}
-Die Zitierbefehle richten sich folglich nach diesem.
-
-Für die beiden häufigsten Zitierweisen wurden Kurzformen geschaffen:\\
-\verb|\zit{demmig2004}{13ff.}| $\rightarrow$ \zit{demmig2004}{13ff.}\\
-und\\
-\verb|\tzit{demmig2004}{13ff.}| $\rightarrow$ \tzit{demmig2004}{13ff.}
-
-Die danach gebräuchlichsten Zitierbefehle sind \texttt{parencite} und \texttt{textcite},
-bzw. deren Kurzformen \texttt{pcite} und \texttt{tcite}:\\
-\verb+\pcite{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \parencite{demmig2004}\\
-\verb+\pcite[13ff.]{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \parencite[13ff.]{demmig2004}\\
-\verb+\pcite[siehe][]{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \parencite[siehe][]{demmig2004}\\
-\verb+\pcite[siehe][13ff.]{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \parencite[siehe][13ff.]{demmig2004}\\
-und\\
-\verb+\tcite{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \textcite{demmig2004}.\\
-\verb+\tcite[13ff.]{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \textcite[13ff.]{demmig2004}.\\
-\verb+\tcite[siehe][]{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \textcite[siehe][]{demmig2004}.\\
-\verb+\tcite[siehe][13ff.]{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \textcite[siehe][13ff.]{demmig2004}.
-
-Daneben existieren eine Reihe weiterer Zitierbefehle:\\
-\verb+\cite{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \cite{demmig2004}\\
-\verb+\cite[13ff.]{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \cite[13ff.]{demmig2004}\\
-\verb+\cite[siehe][13ff.]{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \cite[siehe][13ff.]{demmig2004}
-
-\verb+\cite*{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \cite*{demmig2004} (gibt nur die Jahreszahl aus)\\
-\verb+\cite*[13ff.]{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \cite*[13ff.]{demmig2004}
-
-\verb+\parencite*[13ff.]{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \parencite*[13ff.]{demmig2004}
-
-\verb+\parencites[siehe][13ff.]{demmig2004}[sowie][123]{schlager2005}+ $\rightarrow$\\ \parencites[siehe][13ff.]{demmig2004}[sowie][123]{schlager2005}.
-
-Einfacher dürfte es hier jedoch sein zu schreiben:\\
-\verb+(siehe \cite[13ff.]{demmig2004} sowie \cite[123]{schlager2005})+ \\
-% $\rightarrow$\\ (siehe \cite[13ff.]{demmig2004} sowie \cite[123]{schlager2005})
-was das selbe Ergebnis liefert.
-
-\verb+\footcite[siehe][13ff.]{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \footcite[siehe][13ff.]{demmig2004}
-
-Auch einzelne Felder können angesprochen werden:\\
-\verb+\citeauthor{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \citeauthor{demmig2004}\\
-\verb+\citetitle{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \citetitle{demmig2004}\\
-\verb+\citeyear{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \citeyear{demmig2004}\\
-\verb+\citeurl{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ \citeurl{demmig2004}\\
-\verb+\citetype{demmig2004}+ $\rightarrow$ Das \texttt{type}-Feld des Eintrages.
-
-
-\section{Tips für die Literaturdatenbank}
-%
-Die Datenbank sollte im Encoding \emph{ISO8859-15} vorliegen.
-Diese Kodierung entspricht in etwa \texttt{latin9} bzw. \texttt{ansinew} unter \LaTeX.
-Unter \texttt{JabRef} stellt man dies unter \texttt{Optionen / Einstellungen / Standard-Zeichenkodierung} ein.
-Mit der Kodierung \texttt{CP1252} gab es bereits Probleme.
-Bei dieser Gelegenheit sollte man auch bei "`Neue Einträge mit Datum versehen. Datumsformat:"'
-\texttt{yyyy-MM-dd} eintragen.
-So kann man später diesen "`timestamp"' in andere Datumsfelder (z.\,B. \texttt{urldate}) übernehmen.
-Datumsangaben müssen in der sog. ISO-8602-Notierung (JJJJ-MM-TT) vorliegen.
-Ein Beispiel: Das Datum, an dem eine Internetquelle abgerufen wurde (\texttt{urldate}) ist:
-2010-02-16 für den 16. Februar 2010.
-
-Das Eingabeformat für Autoren ist: "`\emph{Vorname Nachname}"'.
-Verschiedene Autoren werden mit \texttt{and} getrennt.
-Für weitere Autoren z.\,B. "`u.a."' schreibt man \texttt{and others}.
-den Namen von Institutionen schreibt man am besten in geschweifte Klammern,
-so wird die automatische Erkennung von Vornamen und Nachnamen ausgeschaltet und der Name nicht getrennt.
-Nicht nötig ist es, den ersten Buchstaben von Autoren oder Titeln in geschweifte Klammern zu schreiben.
-
-Artikel, Bücher, und Beiträge aus Sammelbänden werden (wie gewohnt) als
-\texttt{article}, \texttt{book} und \texttt{inbook} eingetragen.
-Die Felder \texttt{url} und \texttt{urldate} können verwendet werden.
-Der Ort des Verlages heisst "`\texttt{location}"'.
-
-Diskussionspapiere und ähnliche Dokumente sollten als \texttt{report} eingetragen werden.
-Die Felder \texttt{author}, \texttt{title} und \texttt{year} sind obligatorisch.
-Vermerke wie "`IWH Diskussionspapier 04/2010"' werden als \texttt{type} eingetragen.
-Die Felder \texttt{url} und \texttt{urldate} können verwendet werden.
-
-Quellen aus dem Internet, welche keiner anderen Dokumentenklasse zugeordnet werden können,
-werden als \texttt{electronic} eingetragen.
-Die Felder \texttt{url} und \texttt{urldate} gelten hierbei als Mindestanforderungen.
-
-\texttt{JabRef} bietet die Möglichkeit, zu jeder Quelle in der Datenbank einen \emph{Review} anzulegen.
-Die können Textstellen und Bemerkungen eingetragen werden.
-Später kann die Datenbank mit der Volltextsuche nach Begriffen durchsucht werden.
-Den \texttt{abstract} einer Quelle sollte man nicht hier, sondern in das Feld \texttt{Abstract} eingeben bzw. kopieren.
-
-
-
-%\section{Hinweis zur "`doppelten zweiten Seite"'}
-%%
-%Die zweite Seite des IWH-Vorspanns wird zwei Mal ausgegeben - einmal mit ISSN und einmal ohne ISSN.
-%Beide Male trägt sie auch die Seitennummer \emph{2}.
-%Dies ist eine Vorgabe von Frau Dede, die anschließend hieraus zum einen
-%die Online-Version und zum anderen eine Kopiervorlage erstellt.
-%
-%Hiermit hängt auch die Warnung\\
-%\verb+pdfTeX warning (ext4):+\newline \verb+destination with the same identifier (name{page.2})+\\
-%zusammen. Diese kann ignoriert werden.
-
-
-
-\section{Literaturhinweise für Anfänger}
-%
-Wer kein Geld für Bücher ausgeben will, dem seien die einführenden Skripte "`\citetitle{Hagen1}"' und "`\citetitle{Hagen2}"' der FernUni Hagen ans Herz gelegt \parencites{Hagen1}{Hagen2}.
-
-Gute einführende Bücher zum Thema \LaTeX{} sind z.\,B. "`\citetitle{schlager2005}"' \parencite{schlager2005} und "`\citetitle{demmig2004}"' \parencite{demmig2004}.
-
-Weitere (\TeX nische) Informationen über die hier verwendete vorgestellte Dokumentenklasse \texttt{iwhdp} finden sich in
-\tcite{Ehrenfeld2010LaTeX} und \tcite{Ehrenfeld2011iwhdp}.
-
-
-\section{\TeX nische Hinweise - häufige Nachfragen}
-%
-\emph{Wie kann die (einzeilige) Tabellen- bzw. Abbildungsüberschrift zentriert werden?}\\
-Dazu dient der Befehl:\\
-\verb+\KOMAoption{captions}{nooneline}% oneline: zentriert. nooneline: links+\\
-\verb+oneline+ zentriert die einzeilige Überschrift.
-\verb+nooneline+ setzt sie wie mehrzeilige - also linksbündig.
-Der Parameter sollte vor \verb+\begin{document}+ gesetzt werden.
-
-\emph{Wie können die Absatzzwischenräume geändert werden?}\\
-Erste Antwort: \textit{Die Absatzzwischenräume sollten gar nicht verändert werden!}\\
-Zweite Antwort: Dazu dient der Befehl:
-\verb+\setlength{\parskip}+, beispielsweise\\
-\verb+\setlength{\parskip}{8pt plus0pt minus2pt}+.
-\verb+parkip+ ist ein sog. elastisches Maß:
-Das \verb+plus+ gibt an, um wieviel der Parameter notfalls gedehnt werden kann -
-\verb+minus+ gibt an, um wieviel der Parameter gestaucht werden darf.
-Der Parameter sollte nach \verb+\makeiwhtitle+ gesetzt werden.\\
-\emph{\textbf{!} Es wird ausdrücklich davor gewarnt, diesen Parameter zu verändern \textbf{!}}
-
-\makebib
-\end{document}
-% EOF Anleitung.tex
\ No newline at end of file
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_paper.bib new/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_paper.bib
--- old/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_paper.bib 2011-04-21 01:06:28.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_paper.bib 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-% This file was created with JabRef 2.6.
-% Encoding: ISO8859_15
-
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_paper.tex new/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_paper.tex
--- old/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_paper.tex 2012-09-11 00:52:36.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_paper.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-%=====================================================%
-% IWH DISKUSSIONSPAPIER %
-% Vorlage: Wilfried Ehrenfeld (2011-07) %
-%=====================================================%
-\documentclass[german, biber]{iwhdp}
-\addbibresource{iwhdp_paper.bib}
-\begin{document}
-%-----------------------------------------------------%
-\title{Die \LaTeX-Vorlage für IWH-Diskussionspapiere}
-\titlealt{The \LaTeX{} template for IWH discussion papers}
-%
-\author{Wilfried Ehrenfeld}
-\department{Abteilung Strukturökonomik}
-\tel{+49\,(0)\,345 7753-832}
-\email{wilfried.ehrenfeld@iwh-halle.de}
-%
-%\cauthor{}
-%\cdepartment{}
-%\ctel{}
-%\cemail{}
-%
-%\dpdate{05}{1984}% {Monat}{Jahr} - Nur nötig, wenn abeichend.
-%\dpnumber{1}% Nach Zuteilung aktivieren und eintragen.
-%
-\dpabstract{Dies ist die \LaTeX-Vorlage für IWH-Diskussionspapiere.}
-\dpabstractalt{This is the \LaTeX{} template for IWH discussion papers.}
-%
-\keywords{IWH, \LaTeX, Vorlage, iwhdp}
-\keywordsalt{IWH, \LaTeX, template, iwhdp}
-%
-\jel{Z0}
-%
-%\thanks{Danke.}
-%\thanksalt{Thanks.}
-%-----------------------------------------------------%
-% \makeiwhtitle
-%-----------------------------------------------------%
-\section{Einführung}
-Im Anfang schuf Gott Himmel und Erde. ...
-%-----------------------------------------------------%
-\clearpage \makebib
-\end{document}
-% EOF iwhdp_paper.tex
\ No newline at end of file
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/fp.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/fp.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/fp.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/fp.doc.tlpobj 2010-06-10 18:28:05.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+name fp.doc
+category Package
+revision 15878
+shortdesc doc files of fp
+relocated 1
+docfiles size=6
+ RELOC/doc/latex/fp/README
+ RELOC/doc/latex/fp/fp.tex
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/iwhdp.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/iwhdp.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/iwhdp.doc.tlpobj 2012-09-11 04:30:30.000000000 +0200
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/iwhdp.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-name iwhdp.doc
-category Package
-revision 27639
-shortdesc doc files of iwhdp
-relocated 1
-docfiles size=100
- RELOC/doc/latex/iwhdp/README
- RELOC/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_Manual.bib
- RELOC/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_Manual.pdf
- RELOC/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_Manual.tex
- RELOC/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_paper.bib
- RELOC/doc/latex/iwhdp/iwhdp_paper.tex
++++++ iwhdp.tar.xz -> fp.tar.xz ++++++
++++ 5215 lines of diff (skipped)
++++++ ifplatform.doc.tar.xz -> frame.doc.tar.xz ++++++
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/generic/frame/Changes new/doc/generic/frame/Changes
--- old/doc/generic/frame/Changes 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/generic/frame/Changes 2010-05-17 18:08:46.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+$Id: Changes 320 2010-05-15 09:42:13Z herbert $
+
+--- frame.tex
+1.0 2010-05-15 - LPPL license (hv)
+ - small changes to the code (hv)
+
+--- frame.sty
+2010-05-15 - wrapper file for LaTeX (hv)
+
+
+--- frame-doc.tex
+2010-05-14 - updated and LaTeX2e compatible (hv)
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/generic/frame/Makefile new/doc/generic/frame/Makefile
--- old/doc/generic/frame/Makefile 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/generic/frame/Makefile 2010-05-17 18:08:46.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+
+# `Makefile' for `frame-doc.pdf', hv, 2007/03/17
+
+.SUFFIXES : .tex .ltx .dvi .ps .pdf .eps
+
+PACKAGE = frame
+
+MAIN = $(PACKAGE)-doc
+
+TDS = ~/PSTricks/PSTricks-TDS
+
+LATEX = latex
+
+ARCHNAME = $(MAIN)-$(shell date +%y%m%d)
+
+ARCHFILES = $(PACKAGE).sty $(PACKAGE).tex $(PACKAGE).pro $(MAIN).tex README Changes Makefile
+
+all : doc clean
+doc: $(MAIN).pdf
+
+$(MAIN).pdf : $(MAIN).ps
+# GS_OPTIONS=-dAutoRotatePages=/None
+ ps2pdf $<
+
+$(MAIN).ps : $(MAIN).dvi
+ dvips $<
+
+$(MAIN).dvi : $(MAIN).tex
+ $(LATEX) $<
+ $(LATEX) $<
+# if ! test -f $(basename $<).glo ; then touch $(basename $<).glo; fi
+# if ! test -f $(basename $<).idx ; then touch $(basename $<).idx; fi
+# makeindex -t $(basename $<).ilg -s pst-doc.ist -o $(basename $<).ind $(basename $<).idx
+# makeindex -s gglo.ist -t $(basename $<).glg -o $(basename $<).gls \
+# $(basename $<).glo
+# bibtex $(basename $<)
+# $(LATEX) $<
+# $(LATEX) $<
+
+clean :
+ $(RM) $(addprefix $(MAIN), .log .aux .glg .glo .gls .ilg .idx .ind .tmp .toc .out .blg .Roessler .bbl )
+ $(RM) $(addprefix $(MAIN), .dvi .ps .xcp)
+ $(RM) data3d.Roessler
+
+veryclean : clean
+ $(RM) $(addprefix $(MAIN), .pdf .bbl .blg)
+
+arch :
+ zip $(ARCHNAME).zip $(ARCHFILES)
+
+tds:
+ cp -u Changes $(TDS)/doc/generic/$(PACKAGE)/
+ cp -u README $(TDS)/doc/generic/$(PACKAGE)/
+ cp -u $(MAIN).pdf $(TDS)/doc/generic/$(PACKAGE)/
+#
+ cp -u Changes $(TDS)/tex/latex/$(PACKAGE)/
+ cp -u $(PACKAGE).sty $(TDS)/tex/latex/$(PACKAGE)/
+#
+ cp -u Changes $(TDS)/tex/generic/$(PACKAGE)/
+ cp -u $(PACKAGE).tex $(TDS)/tex/generic/$(PACKAGE)/
+#
+ cp -u Changes $(TDS)/dvips/$(PACKAGE)/
+ cp -u $(PACKAGE).pro $(TDS)/dvips/$(PACKAGE)/
+ cp -u $(PACKAGE).pro ~/Links/dvips-local/
+#
+ cp -u Changes $(TDS)/source/$(PACKAGE)/
+ cp -u $(MAIN).tex $(TDS)/source/$(PACKAGE)/
+ cp -u $(MAIN).bib $(TDS)/source/$(PACKAGE)/
+ cp -u Makefile $(TDS)/source/$(PACKAGE)/
+
+
+# EOF
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/generic/frame/README new/doc/generic/frame/README
--- old/doc/generic/frame/README 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/generic/frame/README 2010-05-17 18:08:46.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+Save the files frame.sty|tex in a directory, which is part of your
+local TeX tree.
+Then do not forget to run texhash to update this tree.
+For more information see the documentation of your LATEX distribution
+on installing packages into your LATEX distribution or the
+TeX Frequently Asked Questions:
+(http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=instpackages).
+
+
Files old/doc/generic/frame/frame-doc.pdf and new/doc/generic/frame/frame-doc.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/generic/frame/frame-doc.tex new/doc/generic/frame/frame-doc.tex
--- old/doc/generic/frame/frame-doc.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/generic/frame/frame-doc.tex 2010-05-17 18:08:46.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+%% BEGIN frame-doc
+%%
+%% $Id: frame-doc.tex 320 2010-05-15 09:42:13Z herbert $
+\documentclass[12pt]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage{mathpazo,url}
+\usepackage[colorlinks,linktocpage]{hyperref}
+
+\usepackage{frame}
+\let\Ffv\fileversion
+% Usage:
+% \fancyframebox {rule thickness} {separation from inner guy} {inner guy}
+%
+% \makeemptybox {width} {height} {depth}
+\begin{document}
+\title{Documentation for frame.tex:\\
+ fancy frames for generic TeX}
+\author{Timothy Van Zandt\thanks{The documentation was put into
+ \LaTeX\ format by Herbert Vo\ss}\\ \url{tvz@Princeton.EDU}}
+\date{Version \Ffv\\[3pt] \today}
+
+\maketitle
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+
+\begin{abstract}
+\texttt{frame.tex/frame.sty} provides fancy frames for generic TeX
+\end{abstract}
+
+\clearpage
+\tableofcontents
+\clearpage
+
+\section{Usage}
+
+\setbox0=\hbox{\it the center}
+\count11=1
+\loop\ifnum\count11<11
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\fancyframebox{.1pt}{5pt}{\unhbox0}}
+ \advance\count11 by1
+\repeat
+
+\vbox{\centerline{\box0}\vss}
+
+This paragraph is probably rather hard to read. I have used \TeX's
+rule-drawing and macro capability to set 10 boxes on top of the
+text. This was rather easy to do in \TeX. I challenge anyone
+to come up with as simple a method for {\it troff}.
+
+\def\\{\char`\\}\def\{{\char`\{}\def\}{\char`\}}
+The command I used was:
+
+$$\hbox{\tt \\fancyframebox\{.1pt\}\{5pt\}\{{\it text to be boxed}\}}$$
+
+{\tt \\fancyframebox} makes a framed {\tt \\hbox} containing its
+third argument, surrounded by extra space (its second argument),
+and rules on all four sides whose width is its first argument.
+To get 10 boxes, you just re-frame 10 times. I used a {\tt \\loop}
+construct, but one could just write out 10 nested {\tt \\fancyframebox}
+calls.
+
+In order to center the fancy boxes, I put them into {\tt \\box0} and
+used {\tt \\centerline\{\\box0\}} to write it out. To make the
+text come out on top, I put it in a {\tt \\vbox to 0pt} construct,
+making \TeX\ try to squeeze everything vertically to zero. A
+{\tt \\vss} allowed the {\tt \\vbox} to shrink (without it \TeX
+\ would still have done the job, but would have complained about
+an ``overfull {\tt \\vbox}'').[Ed.-Example was changed...]
+
+Thus, the final set of commands, including the \TeX\ loop instructions,
+to typeset the boxes was
+
+\bigskip
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\setbox0=\hbox{\it the center}
+\count11=1
+\loop\ifnum\count11<11
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\fancyframebox{.1pt}{5pt}{\unhbox0}}
+ \advance\count11 by1
+\repeat
+
+\vbox{\centerline{\box0}\vss}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\bigskip
+
+Simple---at least when you consider the task\dots.
+
+\section{Macros}
+
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\fancyframebox{rule thickness}{separation from inner guy}{inner guy}
+\makeemptybox{width}{height}{depth}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{document}
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/ifplatform/README new/doc/latex/ifplatform/README
--- old/doc/latex/ifplatform/README 2011-01-24 01:28:42.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/latex/ifplatform/README 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-______________________
-The IFPLATFORM package
-v0.4 2010/10/22
-
-This package uses heuristics to establish whether
-the document is being processed on Windows or a *NIX
-platform (Mac OS X, Linux, etc.).
-
-Except if you're using LuaTeX where this information
-is already known. Otherwise, shell escape is required
-to differentiate different *NIX platforms.
-
-Booleans provided are:
- - ifwindows
- - iflinux
- - ifmacosx
- - ifcygwin
-
-Finally, the \platformname macro is also provided that
-expands to a string of the platform name.
-
-Will Robertson wspr 81 at gmail dot com
-Johannes GroÃe
-
-Copyright 2007-2010 Will Robertson
-Copyright 2007 Johannes GroÃe
-Distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License
Files old/doc/latex/ifplatform/ifplatform.pdf and new/doc/latex/ifplatform/ifplatform.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/frame.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/frame.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/frame.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/frame.doc.tlpobj 2010-06-10 18:28:07.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+name frame.doc
+category Package
+revision 18312
+shortdesc doc files of frame
+relocated 1
+docfiles size=13
+ RELOC/doc/generic/frame/Changes
+ RELOC/doc/generic/frame/Makefile
+ RELOC/doc/generic/frame/README
+ RELOC/doc/generic/frame/frame-doc.pdf
+ RELOC/doc/generic/frame/frame-doc.tex
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifplatform.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifplatform.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifplatform.doc.tlpobj 2011-01-24 04:10:29.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifplatform.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-name ifplatform.doc
-category Package
-revision 21156
-shortdesc doc files of ifplatform
-relocated 1
-docfiles size=38
- RELOC/doc/latex/ifplatform/README
- RELOC/doc/latex/ifplatform/ifplatform.pdf
++++++ ifplatform.doc.tar.xz -> frame.tar.xz ++++++
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/ifplatform/README new/doc/latex/ifplatform/README
--- old/doc/latex/ifplatform/README 2011-01-24 01:28:42.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/latex/ifplatform/README 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-______________________
-The IFPLATFORM package
-v0.4 2010/10/22
-
-This package uses heuristics to establish whether
-the document is being processed on Windows or a *NIX
-platform (Mac OS X, Linux, etc.).
-
-Except if you're using LuaTeX where this information
-is already known. Otherwise, shell escape is required
-to differentiate different *NIX platforms.
-
-Booleans provided are:
- - ifwindows
- - iflinux
- - ifmacosx
- - ifcygwin
-
-Finally, the \platformname macro is also provided that
-expands to a string of the platform name.
-
-Will Robertson wspr 81 at gmail dot com
-Johannes GroÃe
-
-Copyright 2007-2010 Will Robertson
-Copyright 2007 Johannes GroÃe
-Distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License
Files old/doc/latex/ifplatform/ifplatform.pdf and new/doc/latex/ifplatform/ifplatform.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tex/generic/frame/frame.sty new/tex/generic/frame/frame.sty
--- old/tex/generic/frame/frame.sty 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tex/generic/frame/frame.sty 2010-05-17 18:08:46.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+%% $Id: frame.sty 320 2010-05-15 09:42:13Z herbert $
+\ProvidesPackage{frame}[2010/05/15 package wrapper for
+ frame.tex (hv)]
+\input{frame.tex}
+\ProvidesFile{frame.tex}
+ [\filedate\space v\fileversion\space `frame' (tvz,hv)]
+%
+\endinput
+
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tex/generic/frame/frame.tex new/tex/generic/frame/frame.tex
--- old/tex/generic/frame/frame.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tex/generic/frame/frame.tex 2010-05-17 18:08:46.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+%%
+%% $Id: frame.tex 320 2010-05-15 09:42:13Z herbert $
+%%
+%% COPYRIGHT 1992/2010, by Timothy Van Zandt, tvz@Princeton.EDU
+%% COPYRIGHT 2010, by Herbert Voss, hvoss@tug.org
+%%
+%% Copyright:
+%% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+%% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN archives
+%% in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt.
+%%
+%% DESCRIPTION:
+%% frame.tex/frame.sty provides fancy frames for generic TeX
+%
+% Usage:
+% \fancyframebox {rule thickness} {separation from inner guy} {inner guy}
+%
+% \makeemptybox {width} {height} {depth}
+%%
+%
+\def\fileversion{1.0}
+\def\filedate{2010/05/15}
+%
+\csname FrameLoaded\endcsname
+\let\FrameLoaded\endinput
+%
+\edef\TheAtCode{\the\catcode`\@}
+\catcode`\@=11\relax
+\message{\space\space v\fileversion\space\space \filedate\space\space <tvz>}
+
+\newbox\fancyboxA
+\newbox\fancyboxB
+\newdimen\fancyboxD
+
+\def\makeemptybox#1#2#3{\setbox\fancyboxA=\hbox{}\wd\fancyboxA=#1\relax
+ \ht\fancyboxA=#2\relax \dp\fancyboxA=#3\relax \box\fancyboxA }
+
+\def\fancyframebox#1#2#3{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \setbox\fancyboxB=\hbox{#3}%
+ \dimen\fancyboxD=#1\relax
+ \advance\dimen\fancyboxD by #2\relax
+ \advance\dimen\fancyboxD by \dp\fancyboxB
+ \hbox{%
+ \lower\dimen\fancyboxD\hbox{%
+ \vbox{%
+ \hrule height #1\relax
+ \hbox{%
+ \vrule width #1\relax
+ \kern #2\relax
+ \vbox{\vskip #2\relax\box\fancyboxB\vskip #2\relax}%
+ \kern #2\relax
+ \vrule width #1\relax}%
+ \hrule height #1\relax}}}}
+%
+\expandafter\catcode`\@=\TheAtCode\relax
+\endinput
+%% END frame.tex/frame.sty
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/frame.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/frame.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/frame.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/frame.tlpobj 2010-06-10 18:28:07.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+name frame
+category Package
+revision 18312
+shortdesc Framed boxes for Plain TeX.
+relocated 1
+longdesc A jiffy file (taken from fancybox) for placing a frame around a
+longdesc box of text. The macros also provide for typesetting an empty
+longdesc box of given dimensions.
+runfiles size=2
+ RELOC/tex/generic/frame/frame.sty
+ RELOC/tex/generic/frame/frame.tex
+catalogue-ctan /macros/generic/frame
+catalogue-date 2010-06-06 13:50:32 +0200
+catalogue-license lppl
+catalogue-version 1.0
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifplatform.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifplatform.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifplatform.doc.tlpobj 2011-01-24 04:10:29.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifplatform.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-name ifplatform.doc
-category Package
-revision 21156
-shortdesc doc files of ifplatform
-relocated 1
-docfiles size=38
- RELOC/doc/latex/ifplatform/README
- RELOC/doc/latex/ifplatform/ifplatform.pdf
++++++ ifplatform.doc.tar.xz -> framed.doc.tar.xz ++++++
Files old/doc/latex/framed/framed.pdf and new/doc/latex/framed/framed.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/framed/framed.tex new/doc/latex/framed/framed.tex
--- old/doc/latex/framed/framed.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/latex/framed/framed.tex 2012-06-02 00:08:28.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+\documentclass[DIV=8, pagesize=auto]{scrartcl}
+
+\usepackage{fixltx2e}
+\usepackage{etex}
+\usepackage{lmodern}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage{textcomp}
+\usepackage{array}
+\usepackage{booktabs}
+\usepackage{microtype}
+\usepackage[unicode=true]{hyperref}
+
+\newcommand*{\mail}[1]{\href{mailto:#1}{\texttt{#1}}}
+\newcommand*{\pkg}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\cs}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash#1}}
+\makeatletter
+\newcommand*{\cmd}[1]{\cs{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}}
+\makeatother
+\newcommand*{\env}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\opt}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\meta}[1]{\textlangle\textsl{#1}\textrangle}
+\newcommand*{\marg}[1]{\texttt{\{}\meta{#1}\texttt{\}}}
+
+\addtokomafont{title}{\rmfamily}
+
+\title{The \pkg{framed} package\thanks{This manual corresponds to \pkg{framed}~v0.96, dated~2011/10/22.}}
+\author{Donald Arseneau (\mail{asnd@triumf.ca})}
+\date{2012/05/31}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\noindent
+Create framed, shaded, or differently highlighted regions that can
+break across pages. The environments defined are
+
+\medskip
+\noindent
+\begin{tabular}{@{}>{\ttfamily}l@{~~--~~}l@{}}
+ framed & ordinary frame box (\cmd{\fbox}) with edge at margin \\
+ oframed & framed with open top/bottom at page breaks \\
+ shaded & shaded background (\cmd{\colorbox}) bleeding into margin \\
+ shaded* & shaded background (\cmd{\colorbox}) with edge at margin \\
+ snugshade & shaded with tight fit around text (esp. in lists) \\
+ snugshade*& like snugshade with shading edge at margin \\
+ leftbar & thick vertical line in left margin \\
+ titled-frame & frame with title-bar; template for others
+\end{tabular}
+\medskip
+
+\noindent
+to be used like
+%
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \begin{framed}
+ copious text
+ \end{framed}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+But the more general purpose of this package is to facilitate the
+definition of new environments that take multi-line material,
+wrap it with some non-breakable formatting (some kind of box or
+decoration) and allow page breaks in the material. Such environments
+are defined to declare (or use) \cmd{\FrameCommand} for applying the boxy
+decoration, and \cmd{\MakeFramed}\marg{settings} \ldots\ \cmd{\endMakeFramed}
+wrapped around the main text (environment body).
+
+The ``\env{framed}'' environment uses \cmd{\fbox}, by default, as its \cmd{\FrameCommand}
+with the additional settings \verb+\fboxrule=\FrameRule+ and \verb+\fboxsep=\FrameSep+.
+You can change these lengths (using \cmd{\setlength}) and you can change
+the definition of \cmd{\FrameCommand} to use much fancier boxes.
+
+In fact, the ``\env{shaded}'' environment just redefines \cmd{\FrameCommand} to be
+\verb+\colorbox{shadecolor}+ (and you have to define the color ``\texttt{shadecolor}'':
+\verb+\definecolor{shadecolor}...+).
+
+Although the intention is for other packages to define the varieties
+of decoration, a command \cmd{\OpenFbox} is defined for frames with open
+tops or bottoms, and used for the ``\env{oframed}'' environment. This
+facility is based on a more complex and capable command \cmd{\CustomFBox} which can
+be used for a wider range of frame styles. One such style of a title-bar
+frame with continuation marks is provided as an example. It is used by
+the ``\env{titled-frame}'' environment. To make use of \env{titled-frame} in your
+document, or the \cmd{\TitleBarFrame} command in your own environment
+definitions, you must define the colors \texttt{TFFrameColor} (for the frame)
+and a contrasting \texttt{TFTitleColor} (for the title text).
+
+A page break is allowed, and even encouraged, before the \env{framed}
+and other environments. If you want to attach some text (a box title) to the
+frame, then the text should be inserted by \cmd{\FrameCommand} so it cannot
+be separated from the body.
+
+The contents of the framed regions are restricted:
+Floats, footnotes, marginpars and head-line entries will be lost.
+(Some of these may be handled in a later version.)
+This package will not work with the page breaking of \pkg{multicol.sty},
+or other systems that perform column-balancing.
+
+The \env{MakeFramed} environment does the work. Its ``\meta{settings}'' argument
+should contain any adjustments to the text width (via a setting of \cmd{\hsize}).
+Here, the parameter \cmd{\width} gives the measured extra width
+added by the frame, so a common setting is ``\verb+\advance\hsize-\width+''
+which reduces the width of the text just enough that the outer edge
+of the frame aligns with the margins. The ``\meta{settings}'' should also
+include a `restore' command -- \cmd{\@parboxrestore} or \cmd{\FrameRestore}
+or something similar; for instance, the snugshade environment uses
+settings to eliminate list indents and vertical space, but uses
+\cmd{\hspace} in its \cmd{\FrameCommand} to reproduce the list margin ouside the
+shading.
+
+There are actually four variants of \cmd{\FrameCommand} to allow different
+formatting for each part of an environment broken over pages. Unbroken
+text is adorned by \cmd{\FrameCommand}, whereas split text first uses
+\cmd{\FirstFrameCommand}, possibly followed by \cmd{\MidFrameCommand}, and
+finishing with \cmd{\LastFrameCommand}. The default definitions for
+these three just invokes \cmd{\FrameCommand}, so that all portions are
+framed the same way. See the \env{oframe} environment for use of distinct
+First/Mid/Last frames.
+
+\section*{Expert commands:}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \cmd{\MakeFramed}, \cmd{\endMakeFramed}: the ``\env{MakeFramed}'' environment
+\item \cmd{\FrameCommand}: command to draw the frame around its argument
+\item \cmd{\FirstFrameCommand}: the frame for the first part of a split environment
+\item \cmd{\LastFrameCommand}: frame for the last portion
+\item \cmd{\MidFrameCommand}: for any intermediate segments
+\item \cmd{\FrameRestore}: restore some text settings, but fewer than \cmd{\@parbox\-restore}
+\item \cmd{\FrameRule}: length register; \cmd{\fboxrule} for default ``\env{framed}''.
+\item \cmd{\FrameSep}: length register; \cmd{\fboxsep} for default ``\env{framed}''.
+\item \cmd{\FrameHeightAdjust}: macro; height of frame above baseline at top of page
+\item \cmd{\OuterFrameSep}: vertical space before and after the framed env.; defaults to \cmd{\topsep}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\medskip
+This is still a `pre-production' version because I can think of many
+features/improvements that should be made. Also, a detailed manual needs
+to be written. Nevertheless, starting with version~0.5 it should be bug-free.
+
+
+\section*{ToDo:}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Test more varieties of list
+\item Improve and correct documentation
+\item Propagation of \cmd{\marks}
+\item Handle footnotes (how??) floats (?) and marginpars.
+\item Stretchability modification.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\end{document}
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/ifplatform/README new/doc/latex/ifplatform/README
--- old/doc/latex/ifplatform/README 2011-01-24 01:28:42.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/latex/ifplatform/README 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-______________________
-The IFPLATFORM package
-v0.4 2010/10/22
-
-This package uses heuristics to establish whether
-the document is being processed on Windows or a *NIX
-platform (Mac OS X, Linux, etc.).
-
-Except if you're using LuaTeX where this information
-is already known. Otherwise, shell escape is required
-to differentiate different *NIX platforms.
-
-Booleans provided are:
- - ifwindows
- - iflinux
- - ifmacosx
- - ifcygwin
-
-Finally, the \platformname macro is also provided that
-expands to a string of the platform name.
-
-Will Robertson wspr 81 at gmail dot com
-Johannes GroÃe
-
-Copyright 2007-2010 Will Robertson
-Copyright 2007 Johannes GroÃe
-Distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License
Files old/doc/latex/ifplatform/ifplatform.pdf and new/doc/latex/ifplatform/ifplatform.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/framed.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/framed.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/framed.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/framed.doc.tlpobj 2012-06-02 04:29:26.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+name framed.doc
+category Package
+revision 26789
+shortdesc doc files of framed
+relocated 1
+docfiles size=60
+ RELOC/doc/latex/framed/framed.pdf
+ RELOC/doc/latex/framed/framed.tex
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifplatform.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifplatform.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifplatform.doc.tlpobj 2011-01-24 04:10:29.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifplatform.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-name ifplatform.doc
-category Package
-revision 21156
-shortdesc doc files of ifplatform
-relocated 1
-docfiles size=38
- RELOC/doc/latex/ifplatform/README
- RELOC/doc/latex/ifplatform/ifplatform.pdf
++++++ ifplatform.doc.tar.xz -> framed.tar.xz ++++++
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/ifplatform/README new/doc/latex/ifplatform/README
--- old/doc/latex/ifplatform/README 2011-01-24 01:28:42.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/latex/ifplatform/README 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-______________________
-The IFPLATFORM package
-v0.4 2010/10/22
-
-This package uses heuristics to establish whether
-the document is being processed on Windows or a *NIX
-platform (Mac OS X, Linux, etc.).
-
-Except if you're using LuaTeX where this information
-is already known. Otherwise, shell escape is required
-to differentiate different *NIX platforms.
-
-Booleans provided are:
- - ifwindows
- - iflinux
- - ifmacosx
- - ifcygwin
-
-Finally, the \platformname macro is also provided that
-expands to a string of the platform name.
-
-Will Robertson wspr 81 at gmail dot com
-Johannes GroÃe
-
-Copyright 2007-2010 Will Robertson
-Copyright 2007 Johannes GroÃe
-Distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License
Files old/doc/latex/ifplatform/ifplatform.pdf and new/doc/latex/ifplatform/ifplatform.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tex/latex/framed/framed.sty new/tex/latex/framed/framed.sty
--- old/tex/latex/framed/framed.sty 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tex/latex/framed/framed.sty 2012-06-02 00:08:28.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,548 @@
+% framed.sty v 0.96 2011/10/22
+% Copyright (C) 1992-2011 by Donald Arseneau (asnd@triumf.ca)
+% These macros may be freely transmitted, reproduced, or modified
+% for any purpose provided that this notice is left intact.
+%
+%====================== Begin Instructions =======================
+%
+% framed.sty
+% ~~~~~~~~~~
+% Create framed, shaded, or differently highlighted regions that can
+% break across pages. The environments defined are
+% framed - ordinary frame box (\fbox) with edge at margin
+% oframed - framed with open top/bottom at page breaks
+% shaded - shaded background (\colorbox) bleeding into margin
+% shaded* - shaded background (\colorbox) with edge at margin
+% snugshade - shaded with tight fit around text (esp. in lists)
+% snugshade* - like snugshade with shading edge at margin
+% leftbar - thick vertical line in left margin
+%
+% to be used like
+% \begin{framed}
+% copious text
+% \end{framed}
+%
+% But the more general purpose of this package is to facilitate the
+% definition of new environments that take multi-line material,
+% wrap it with some non-breakable formatting (some kind of box or
+% decoration) and allow page breaks in the material. Such environments
+% are defined to declare (or use) \FrameCommand for applying the boxy
+% decoration, and \MakeFramed{settings} ... \endMakeFramed wrapped
+% around the main text argument (environment body).
+%
+% The "framed" environment uses "\fbox", by default, as its "\FrameCommand"
+% with the additional settings "\fboxrule=\FrameRule" and "\fboxsep=\FrameSep".
+% You can change these lengths (using "\setlength") and you can change
+% the definition of "\FrameCommand" to use much fancier boxes.
+%
+% In fact, the "shaded" environment just redefines \FrameCommand to be
+% "\colorbox{shadecolor}" (and you have to define the color `"shadecolor"':
+% "\definecolor{shadecolor}...").
+%
+% Although the intention is for other packages to define the varieties
+% of decoration, a command "\OpenFbox" is defined for frames with open
+% tops or bottoms, and used for the "oframed" environment. This facility
+% is based on a more complex and capable command "\CustomFBox" which can
+% be used for a wider range of frame styles. One such style of a title-bar
+% frame with continuation marks is provided as an example. It is used by
+% the "titled-frame" environment. To make use of "titled-frame" in your
+% document, or the "\TitleBarFrame" command in your own environment
+% definitions, you must define the colors TFFrameColor (for the frame)
+% and a contrasting TFTitleColor (for the title text).
+%
+% A page break is allowed, and even encouraged, before the framed
+% environment. If you want to attach some text (a box title) to the
+% frame, then the text should be inserted by \FrameCommand so it cannot
+% be separated from the body.
+%
+% The contents of the framed regions are restricted:
+% Floats, footnotes, marginpars and head-line entries will be lost.
+% (Some of these may be handled in a later version.)
+% This package will not work with the page breaking of multicol.sty,
+% or other systems that perform column-balancing.
+%
+% The MakeFramed environment does the work. Its `settings' argument
+% should contain any adjustments to the text width (via a setting of
+% "\hsize"). Here, the parameter "\width" gives the measured extra width
+% added by the frame, so a common setting is "\advance\hsize-\width"
+% which reduces the width of the text just enough that the outer edge
+% of the frame aligns with the margins. The `settings' should also
+% include a `restore' command -- "\@parboxrestore" or "\FrameRestore"
+% or something similar; for instance, the snugshade environment uses
+% settings to eliminate list indents and vertical space, but uses
+% "\hspace" in "\FrameCommand" to reproduce the list margin ouside the
+% shading.
+%
+% There are actually four variants of "\FrameCommand" to allow different
+% formatting for each part of an environment broken over pages. Unbroken
+% text is adorned by "\FrameCommand", whereas split text first uses
+% "\FirstFrameCommand", possibly followed by "\MidFrameCommand", and
+% finishing with "\LastFrameCommand". The default definitions for
+% these three just invokes "\FrameCommand", so that all portions are
+% framed the same way. See the oframe environment for use of distinct
+% First/Mid/Last frames.
+%
+% Expert commands:
+% \MakeFramed, \endMakeFramed: the "MakeFramed" environment
+% \FrameCommand: command to draw the frame around its argument
+% \FirstFrameCommand: the frame for the first part of a split environment
+% \LastFrameCommand: for the last portion
+% \MidFrameCommand: for any intermediate segments
+% \FrameRestore: restore some text settings, but fewer than \@parboxrestore
+% \FrameRule: length register; \fboxrule for default "framed".
+% \FrameSep: length register; \fboxsep for default "framed".
+% \FrameHeightAdjust: macro; height of frame above baseline at top of page
+% \OuterFrameSep: vertical space before and after the framed env. Defaults to "\topsep"
+%
+% This is still a `pre-production' version because I can think of many
+% features/improvements that should be made. Also, a detailed manual needs
+% to be written. Nevertheless, starting with version 0.5 it should be bug-free.
+%
+% ToDo:
+% Test more varieties of list
+% Improve and correct documentation
+% Propagation of \marks
+% Handle footnotes (how??) floats (?) and marginpars.
+% Stretchability modification.
+% Make inner contents height/depth influence placement.
+%======================== End Instructions ========================
+
+\ProvidesPackage{framed}[2011/10/22 v 0.96:
+ framed or shaded text with page breaks]
+
+\newenvironment{framed}% using default \FrameCommand
+ {\MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}}%
+ {\endMakeFramed}
+
+\newenvironment{shaded}{%
+ \def\FrameCommand{\fboxsep=\FrameSep \colorbox{shadecolor}}%
+ \MakeFramed {\FrameRestore}}%
+ {\endMakeFramed}
+
+\newenvironment{shaded*}{%
+ \def\FrameCommand{\fboxsep=\FrameSep \colorbox{shadecolor}}%
+ \MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}}%
+ {\endMakeFramed}
+
+\newenvironment{leftbar}{%
+ \def\FrameCommand{\vrule width 3pt \hspace{10pt}}%
+ \MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}}%
+ {\endMakeFramed}
+
+% snugshde: Shaded environment that
+% -- uses the default \fboxsep instead of \FrameSep
+% -- leaves the text indent unchanged (shading bleeds out)
+% -- eliminates possible internal \topsep glue (\@setminipage)
+% -- shrinks inside the margins for lists
+% An \item label will tend to hang outside the shading, thanks to
+% the small \fboxsep.
+
+\newenvironment{snugshade}{%
+ \def\FrameCommand##1{\hskip\@totalleftmargin \hskip-\fboxsep
+ \colorbox{shadecolor}{##1}\hskip-\fboxsep
+ % There is no \@totalrightmargin, so:
+ \hskip-\linewidth \hskip-\@totalleftmargin \hskip\columnwidth}%
+ \MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\width
+ \@totalleftmargin\z@ \linewidth\hsize
+ \@setminipage}%
+ }{\par\unskip\@minipagefalse\endMakeFramed}
+
+\newenvironment{snugshade*}{%
+ \def\FrameCommand##1{\hskip\@totalleftmargin
+ \colorbox{shadecolor}{##1}%
+ % There is no \@totalrightmargin, so:
+ \hskip-\linewidth \hskip-\@totalleftmargin \hskip\columnwidth}%
+ \MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\width
+ \@totalleftmargin\z@ \linewidth\hsize
+ \advance\labelsep\fboxsep
+ \@setminipage}%
+ }{\par\unskip\@minipagefalse\endMakeFramed}
+
+\newenvironment{oframed}{% open (top or bottom) framed
+ \def\FrameCommand{\OpenFBox\FrameRule\FrameRule}%
+ \def\FirstFrameCommand{\OpenFBox\FrameRule\z@}%
+ \def\MidFrameCommand{\OpenFBox\z@\z@}%
+ \def\LastFrameCommand{\OpenFBox\z@\FrameRule}%
+ \MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}%
+ }{\endMakeFramed}
+
+% A simplified entry to \CustomFBox with two customized parameters:
+% the thicknesses of the top and bottom rules. Perhaps we want to
+% use less \fboxsep on the open edges?
+
+\def\OpenFBox#1#2{\fboxsep\FrameSep
+ \CustomFBox{}{}{#1}{#2}\FrameRule\FrameRule}
+
+% \CustomFBox is like an amalgamation of \fbox and \@frameb@x,
+% so it can be used by an alternate to \fbox or \fcolorbox, but
+% it has more parameters for various customizations.
+% Parameter #1 is inserted (in vmode) right after the top rule
+% (useful for a title or assignments), and #2 is similar, but
+% inserted right above the bottom rule.
+% The thicknesses of the top, bottom, left, and right rules are
+% given as parameters #3,#4,#5,#6 respectively. They should be
+% \fboxrule or \z@ (or some other thickness).
+% The text argument is #7.
+% An instance of this can be used for the frame of \fcolorbox by
+% locally defining \fbox before \fcolorbox; e.g.,
+% \def\fbox{\CustomFBox{}{}\z@\z@\fboxrule\fboxrule}\fcolorbox
+%
+% Do we need to use different \fboxsep on different sides too?
+%
+\long\def\CustomFBox#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{%
+ \leavevmode\begingroup
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{%
+ \color@begingroup
+ \kern\fboxsep{#7}\kern\fboxsep
+ \color@endgroup}%
+ \hbox{%
+ % Here we calculate and shift for the depth. Done in
+ % a group because one of the arguments might be \@tempdima
+ % (we could use \dimexpr instead without grouping).
+ \begingroup
+ \@tempdima#4\relax
+ \advance\@tempdima\fboxsep
+ \advance\@tempdima\dp\@tempboxa
+ \expandafter\endgroup\expandafter
+ \lower\the\@tempdima\hbox{%
+ \vbox{%
+ \hrule\@height#3\relax
+ #1%
+ \hbox{%
+ \vrule\@width#5\relax
+ \vbox{%
+ \vskip\fboxsep % maybe these should be parameters too
+ \copy\@tempboxa
+ \vskip\fboxsep}%
+ \vrule\@width#6\relax}%
+ #2%
+ \hrule\@height#4\relax}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+
+% A particular type of titled frame with continuation marks.
+% Parameter #1 is the title, repeated on each page.
+\newenvironment{titled-frame}[1]{%
+ \def\FrameCommand{\fboxsep8pt\fboxrule2pt
+ \TitleBarFrame{\textbf{#1}}}%
+ \def\FirstFrameCommand{\fboxsep8pt\fboxrule2pt
+ \TitleBarFrame[$\blacktriangleright$]{\textbf{#1}}}%
+ \def\MidFrameCommand{\fboxsep8pt\fboxrule2pt
+ \TitleBarFrame[$\blacktriangleright$]{\textbf{#1\ (cont)}}}%
+ \def\LastFrameCommand{\fboxsep8pt\fboxrule2pt
+ \TitleBarFrame{\textbf{#1\ (cont)}}}%
+ \MakeFramed{\advance\hsize-20pt \FrameRestore}}%
+% note: 8 + 2 + 8 + 2 = 20. Don't use \width because the frame title
+% could interfere with the width measurement.
+ {\endMakeFramed}
+
+% \TitleBarFrame[marker]{title}{contents}
+% Frame with a label at top, optional continuation marker at bottom right.
+% Frame color is TFFrameColor and title color is a contrasting TFTitleColor;
+% both need to be defined before use. The frame itself use \fboxrule and
+% \fboxsep. If the title is omitted entirely, the title bar is omitted
+% (use a blank space to force a blank title bar).
+%
+\newcommand\TitleBarFrame[3][]{\begingroup
+ \ifx\delimiter#1\delimiter
+ \let\TF@conlab\@empty
+ \else
+ \def\TF@conlab{% continuation label
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \smash{\rlap{\kern\wd\@tempboxa\kern\fboxrule\kern\fboxsep #1}}}%
+ \fi
+ \let\TF@savecolor\current@color
+ \textcolor{TFFrameColor}{%
+ \CustomFBox
+ {\TF@Title{#2}}{\TF@conlab}%
+ \fboxrule\fboxrule\fboxrule\fboxrule
+ {\let\current@color\TF@savecolor\set@color #3}%
+ }\endgroup
+}
+
+% The title bar for \TitleBarFrame
+\newcommand\TF@Title[1]{%
+ \ifx\delimiter#1\delimiter\else
+ \kern-0.04pt\relax
+ \begingroup
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{%
+ \kern0.8ex
+ \hbox{\kern\fboxsep\textcolor{TFTitleColor}{#1}\vphantom{Tj)}}%
+ \kern0.8ex}%
+ \hrule\@height\ht\@tempboxa
+ \kern-\ht\@tempboxa
+ \box\@tempboxa
+ \endgroup
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \kern-0.04pt\relax
+ \fi
+}
+
+\chardef\FrameRestore=\catcode`\| % for debug
+\catcode`\|=\catcode`\% % (debug: insert space after backslash)
+
+\newlength\OuterFrameSep \OuterFrameSep=\maxdimen \relax
+
+\def\MakeFramed#1{\par
+ % apply default \OuterFrameSep = \topsep
+ \ifdim\OuterFrameSep=\maxdimen \OuterFrameSep\topsep \fi
+ % measure added width and height; call result \width and \height
+ \fb@sizeofframe\FrameCommand
+ \let\width\fb@frw \let\height\fb@frh
+ % insert pre-penalties and skips
+ \begingroup
+ \skip@\lastskip
+ \if@nobreak\else
+ \penalty9999 % updates \page parameters
+ \ifdim\pagefilstretch=\z@ \ifdim\pagefillstretch=\z@
+ % not infinitely stretchable, so encourage a page break here
+ \edef\@tempa{\the\skip@}%
+ \ifx\@tempa\zero@glue \penalty-30
+ \else \vskip-\skip@ \penalty-30 \vskip\skip@
+ \fi\fi\fi
+ \penalty\z@
+ % Give a stretchy breakpoint that will always be taken in preference
+ % to the \penalty 9999 used to update page parameters. The cube root
+ % of 10000/100 indicates a multiplier of 0.21545, but the maximum
+ % calculated badness is really 8192, not 10000, so the multiplier
+ % is 0.2301.
+ \advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.5\baselineskip
+ \advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\height
+ \advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\skip@
+ \advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\OuterFrameSep
+ \vskip-\skip@ \penalty 1800 \vskip\skip@
+ \fi
+ \addvspace{\OuterFrameSep}%
+ \endgroup
+ % clear out pending page break
+ \penalty\@M \vskip 2\baselineskip \vskip\height
+ \penalty9999 \vskip -2\baselineskip \vskip-\height
+ \penalty9999 % updates \pagetotal
+|\message{After clearout, \pagetotal=\the\pagetotal, \pagegoal=\the\pagegoal. }%
+ \fb@adjheight
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
+ #1% Modifications to \hsize (can use \width and \height)
+ \textwidth\hsize \columnwidth\hsize
+}
+
+\def\endMakeFramed{\par
+ \kern\z@
+ \hrule\@width\hsize\@height\z@ % possibly bad
+ \penalty-100 % (\hrule moves depth into height)
+ \egroup
+%%% {\showoutput\showbox\@tempboxa}%
+ \begingroup
+ \fb@put@frame\FrameCommand\FirstFrameCommand
+ \endgroup
+ \@minipagefalse % In case it was set and not cleared
+}
+
+% \fb@put@frame takes the contents of \@tempboxa and puts all, or a piece,
+% of it on the page with a frame (\FrameCommand, \FirstFrameCommand,
+% \MidFrameCommand, or \LastFrameCommand). It recurses until all of
+% \@tempboxa has been used up. (\@tempboxa must have zero depth.)
+% #1 = attempted framing command, if no split
+% #2 = framing command if split
+% First iteration: Try to fit with \FrameCommand. If it does not fit,
+% split for \FirstFrameCommand.
+% Later iteration: Try to fit with \LastFrameCommand. If it does not
+% fit, split for \MidFrameCommand.
+\def\fb@put@frame#1#2{\relax
+ \ifdim\pagegoal=\maxdimen \pagegoal\vsize \fi
+| \message{=============== Entering putframe ====================^^J
+| \pagegoal=\the\pagegoal, \pagetotal=\the\pagetotal. }%
+ \ifinner
+ \fb@putboxa#1%
+ \fb@afterframe
+ \else
+ \dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal % natural space left on page
+ \ifdim\dimen@<2\baselineskip % Too little room on page
+| \message{Page has only \the\dimen@\space room left; eject. }%
+ \eject \fb@adjheight \fb@put@frame#1#2%
+ \else % there's appreciable room left on the page
+ \fb@sizeofframe#1%
+| \message{\string\pagetotal=\the\pagetotal,
+| \string\pagegoal=\the\pagegoal,
+| \string\pagestretch=\the\pagestretch,
+| \string\pageshrink=\the\pageshrink,
+| \string\fb@frh=\the\fb@frh. \space}
+| \message{^^JBox of size \the\ht\@tempboxa\space}%
+ \begingroup % temporarily set \dimen@ to be...
+ \advance\dimen@.8\pageshrink % maximum space available on page
+ \advance\dimen@-\fb@frh\relax % max space available for frame's contents
+%%% LOOKS SUBTRACTED AND ADDED, SO DOUBLE ACCOUNTING!
+ \expandafter\endgroup
+ % expand \ifdim, then restore \dimen@ to real room left on page
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\ht\@tempboxa % whole box does fit
+| \message{fits in \the\dimen@. }%
+ % ToDo: Change this to use vsplit anyway to capture the marks
+ % MERGE THIS WITH THE else CLAUSE!!!
+ \fb@putboxa#1%
+ \fb@afterframe
+ \else % box must be split
+| \message{must be split to fit in \the\dimen@. }%
+ % update frame measurement to use \FirstFrameCommand or \MidFrameCommand
+ \fb@sizeofframe#2%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{% simulate frame and flexiblity of the page:
+ \vskip \fb@frh \@plus\pagestretch \@minus.8\pageshrink
+ \kern137sp\kern-137sp\penalty-30
+ \unvbox\@tempboxa}%
+ \edef\fb@resto@set{\boxmaxdepth\the\boxmaxdepth
+ \splittopskip\the\splittopskip}%
+ \boxmaxdepth\z@ \splittopskip\z@
+| \message{^^JPadded box of size \the\ht\@tempboxa\space split to \the\dimen@}%
+ % Split box here
+ \setbox\tw@\vsplit\@tempboxa to\dimen@
+| \toks99\expandafter{\splitfirstmark}%
+| \toks98\expandafter{\splitbotmark}%
+| \message{Marks are: \the\toks99, \the\toks98. }%
+ \setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvbox\tw@}% natural-sized
+| \message{Natural height of split box is \the\ht\tw@, leaving
+| \the\ht\@tempboxa\space remainder. }%
+ % If the split-to size > (\vsize-\topskip), then set box to full size.
+ \begingroup
+ \advance\dimen@\topskip
+ \expandafter\endgroup
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\pagegoal
+| \message{Frame is big -- Use up the full column. }%
+ \dimen@ii\pagegoal
+ \advance\dimen@ii -\topskip
+ \advance\dimen@ii \FrameHeightAdjust\relax
+ \else % suspect this is implemented incorrectly:
+ % If the split-to size > feasible room_on_page, rebox it smaller.
+ \advance\dimen@.8\pageshrink
+ \ifdim\ht\tw@>\dimen@
+| \message{Box too tall; rebox it to \the\dimen@. }%
+ \dimen@ii\dimen@
+ \else % use natural size
+ \dimen@ii\ht\tw@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ % Re-box contents to desired size \dimen@ii
+ \advance\dimen@ii -\fb@frh
+ \setbox\tw@\vbox to\dimen@ii \bgroup
+ % remove simulated frame and page flexibility:
+ \vskip -\fb@frh \@plus-\pagestretch \@minus-.8\pageshrink
+ \unvbox\tw@ \unpenalty\unpenalty
+ \ifdim\lastkern=-137sp % whole box went to next page
+| \message{box split at beginning! }%
+ % need work here???
+ \egroup \fb@resto@set \eject % (\vskip for frame size was discarded)
+ \fb@adjheight
+ \fb@put@frame#1#2% INSERTED ???
+ \else % Got material split off at the head
+ \egroup \fb@resto@set
+ \ifvoid\@tempboxa % it all fit after all
+| \message{box split at end! }%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\box\tw@
+ \fb@putboxa#1%
+ \fb@afterframe
+ \else % it really did split
+| \message{box split as expected. Its reboxed height is \the\ht\tw@. }%
+ \ifdim\wd\tw@>\z@
+ \wd\tw@\wd\@tempboxa
+ \centerline{#2{\box\tw@}}% ??? \centerline bad idea
+ \else
+| \message{Zero width means likely blank. Don't frame it (guess)}%
+ \box\tw@
+ \fi
+ \hrule \@height\z@ \@width\hsize
+ \eject
+ \fb@adjheight
+ \fb@put@frame\LastFrameCommand\MidFrameCommand
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+}
+
+\def\fb@putboxa#1{%
+ \ifvoid\@tempboxa
+ \PackageWarning{framed}{Boxa is void -- discard it. }%
+ \else
+| \message{Frame and place boxa. }%
+| %{\showoutput\showbox\@tempboxa}%
+ \centerline{#1{\box\@tempboxa}}%
+ \fi
+}
+
+\def\fb@afterframe{%
+ \nointerlineskip \null %{\showoutput \showlists}
+ \penalty-30 \vskip\OuterFrameSep \relax
+}
+
+% measure width and height added by frame (#1 = frame command)
+% call results \fb@frw and \fb@frh
+% todo: a mechanism to handle wide frame titles
+\newdimen\fb@frw
+\newdimen\fb@frh
+\def\fb@sizeofframe#1{\begingroup
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\vskip-5in \hbox{\hskip-5in
+ #1{\hbox{\vrule \@height 4.7in \@depth.3in \@width 5in}}}%
+ \vskip\z@skip}%
+| \message{Measuring frame addition for \string#1 in \@currenvir\space
+| gives ht \the\ht\z@\space and wd \the\wd\z@. }%
+| %{\showoutput\showbox\z@}%
+ \global\fb@frw\wd\z@ \global\fb@frh\ht\z@
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\fb@adjheight{%
+ \vbox to\FrameHeightAdjust{}% get proper baseline skip from above.
+ \penalty\@M \nointerlineskip
+ \vskip-\FrameHeightAdjust
+ \penalty\@M} % useful for tops of pages
+
+\edef\zero@glue{\the\z@skip}
+
+\catcode`\|=\FrameRestore
+
+% Provide configuration commands:
+\providecommand\FrameCommand{%
+ \setlength\fboxrule{\FrameRule}\setlength\fboxsep{\FrameSep}%
+ \fbox}
+\@ifundefined{FrameRule}{\newdimen\FrameRule \FrameRule=\fboxrule}{}
+\@ifundefined{FrameSep} {\newdimen\FrameSep \FrameSep =3\fboxsep}{}
+\providecommand\FirstFrameCommand{\FrameCommand}
+\providecommand\MidFrameCommand{\FrameCommand}
+\providecommand\LastFrameCommand{\FrameCommand}
+
+% Height of frame above first baseline when frame starts a page:
+\providecommand\FrameHeightAdjust{6pt}
+
+% \FrameRestore has parts of \@parboxrestore, performing a similar but
+% less complete restoration of the default layout. See how it is used in
+% the "settings" argument of \MakeFrame. Though not a parameter, \hsize
+% should be set to the desired total line width available inside the
+% frame before invoking \FrameRestore.
+\def\FrameRestore{%
+ \let\if@nobreak\iffalse
+ \let\if@noskipsec\iffalse
+ \let\-\@dischyph
+ \let\'\@acci\let\`\@accii\let\=\@acciii
+ % \message{FrameRestore:
+ % \@totalleftmargin=\the \@totalleftmargin,
+ % \rightmargin=\the\rightmargin,
+ % \@listdepth=\the\@listdepth. }%
+ % Test if we are in a list (or list-like paragraph)
+ \ifnum \ifdim\@totalleftmargin>\z@ 1\fi
+ \ifdim\rightmargin>\z@ 1\fi
+ \ifnum\@listdepth>\z@ 1\fi 0>\z@
+ % \message{In a list: \linewidth=\the\linewidth, \@totalleftmargin=\the\@totalleftmargin,
+ % \parshape=\the\parshape, \columnwidth=\the\columnwidth, \hsize=\the\hsize,
+ % \labelwidth=\the\labelwidth. }%
+ \@setminipage % snug fit around the item. I would like this to be non-global.
+ % Now try to propageate changes of width from \hsize to list parameters.
+ % This is deficient, but a more advanced way to indicate modification to text
+ % dimensions is not (yet) provided; in particular, no separate left/right
+ % adjustment.
+ \advance\linewidth-\columnwidth \advance\linewidth\hsize
+ \parshape\@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth
+ \else % Not in list
+ \linewidth=\hsize
+ %\message{No list, set \string\linewidth=\the\hsize. }%
+ \fi
+ \sloppy
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/framed.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/framed.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/framed.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/framed.tlpobj 2012-06-02 04:29:26.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+name framed
+category Package
+revision 26789
+shortdesc Framed or shaded regions that can break across pages.
+relocated 1
+longdesc The package creates three environments: - framed, which puts an
+longdesc ordinary frame box around the region, - shaded, which shades
+longdesc the region, and - leftbar, which places a line at the left
+longdesc side. The environments allow a break at their start (the
+longdesc \FrameCommand enables creation of a title that is "attached" to
+longdesc the environment); breaks are also allowed in the course of the
+longdesc framed/shaded matter. There is also a command \MakeFramed to
+longdesc make your own framed-style environments.
+runfiles size=6
+ RELOC/tex/latex/framed/framed.sty
+catalogue-ctan /macros/latex/contrib/framed
+catalogue-date 2012-06-01 12:48:04 +0200
+catalogue-license other-free
+catalogue-version 0.96
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifplatform.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifplatform.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifplatform.doc.tlpobj 2011-01-24 04:10:29.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifplatform.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-name ifplatform.doc
-category Package
-revision 21156
-shortdesc doc files of ifplatform
-relocated 1
-docfiles size=38
- RELOC/doc/latex/ifplatform/README
- RELOC/doc/latex/ifplatform/ifplatform.pdf
++++++ ifmtarg.doc.tar.xz -> frege.doc.tar.xz ++++++
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/frege/GNU.txt new/doc/latex/frege/GNU.txt
--- old/doc/latex/frege/GNU.txt 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/latex/frege/GNU.txt 2012-07-23 18:41:34.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,340 @@
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+ Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+ Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+ 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+ 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+ 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+ a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+ b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+ whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+ part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+ parties under the terms of this License.
+
+ c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+ when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+ interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+ announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+ notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+ a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+ these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+ License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+ does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+ the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+ 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+ a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+ source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+ 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+ years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+ cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+ machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+ distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+ customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+ to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
+ allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+ received the program in object code or executable form with such
+ an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+ 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+ 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+ 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+ 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+ 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+ 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+ 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+ NO WARRANTY
+
+ 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+ 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+ How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+ If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+ To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+
+ Copyright (C) 19yy <name of author>
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
+
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+ Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author
+ Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+ This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+ under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may
+be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
+mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+ Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
+ `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
+
+ <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
+ Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/frege/INSTALL new/doc/latex/frege/INSTALL
--- old/doc/latex/frege/INSTALL 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/latex/frege/INSTALL 2012-08-16 01:11:17.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+Unfortunately I am no computer expert and I don't know how to provide detailed
+installation instructions for every system out there (let alone create a script
+for that purpose). Instead I will provide what has worked for me using TeX Live
+as bundled for Ubuntu 10.04 LTS, as well as a reference to Stack Exchange.
+
+Note also that the frege package requires both the "amssymb" package and the
+"ifthen" package to be installed. These are both fairly common and will come
+with most versions of LaTeX. If you want to use the bguq option you will also
+need to install the "bguq" package, which may be found on ctan
+(http://www.ctan.org/pkg/bguq).
+
+To install I place the frege.sty file in either one of the following locations:
+
+ /usr/local/share/texmf/tex/latex/frege/
+ /usr/share/texmf-texlive/tex/latex/frege/
+
+One way to find the above paths on your system is to use the kpsewhich command in
+conjunction with a standard latex class. Enter the following into the terminal
+while in the root directory (get there by typing "cd /" and hitting enter):
+
+ kpsewhich article.cls
+ <hit enter>
+
+This should return something like:
+
+ /usr/share/texmf-texlive/tex/latex/base/article.cls
+
+of which you need everything up to the latex/
+
+copying the frege.sty file to one of these locations as well as creating a frege/
+directory will require sudo priveliges. Type the following into Terminal (adjusting
+the <path> as needed and hitting enter after each line):
+
+ sudo mkdir /usr/local/share/texmf/tex/latex/frege
+ <at this point you will need to enter your password>
+ sudo cp <path>/frege.sty /usr/local/share/texmf/tex/latex/frege/frege.sty
+
+once you have done that you will need to navigate to your ls-R file:
+
+ cd /usr/local/share/texmf
+
+this path may once again be found using the kpsewhich command as follows:
+
+ kpsewhich ls-R
+
+once you are in the directory containting the ls-R file type the following:
+
+ sudo mktexlsr
+
+the package is now installed and may be used by placing the following in the
+preamble of a tex file:
+
+ \usepackage{frege}
+
+In case this is completely unhelpful to you (for example because you are using some
+completely different version of LaTeX in a completely different operating system I
+suggest turning to Stack Exchange for help (http://tex.stackexchange.com/).
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/frege/README new/doc/latex/frege/README
--- old/doc/latex/frege/README 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/latex/frege/README 2012-08-16 01:11:17.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+frege.sty - a LaTeX2e package for typesetting begriffsschrift
+
+This package is based on begriff.sty released under the GNU General Public License.
+Copyright (C) 2003 by Josh Parsons
+
+Since version 1.3 this package also makes use of the bguq package by J.J. Green.
+
+Changes with respect to begriff.sty
+
+correct relative lengths of the content stroke with respect to other strokes
+attached to it;
+content strokes point at the middle of the following symbols, rather than the bottom;
+greater width for the assertion stroke as compared to the content stroke;
+a more intuitive structure for the conditional (arguments are now given in the same
+order as they appear on the left of a completed formula);
+the command for the conditional with empty arguments now results in a vertical line
+(conditional stroke) on it's own the other strokes are added as the arguments;
+the linewidth is properly accounted for so that things remain properly centered when
+scaled;
+
+frege.sty defines the following basic commands:
+\Fcontent[1] - plain content stroke
+\Fncontent[1] - negated content stroke
+\Fnncontent[1] - twice negated content stroke
+\Faconten[1] - asserted content stroke
+\Fancontent[1] - asserted negated content stroke
+\Fanncontent[1] - asserted twice negated content stroke
+\Fquant[1]{a} - content stroke with quantifier
+\Fnquant[1]{a} - negated quantifier
+\Fnnquant[1]{a} - twice negated quantifier
+\Fquantn[1]{a} - quantifier with negated content
+\Fquantnn[1]{a} - quantifier with twice negated content
+\Fnquantn[1]{a} - negated quantifier with negated content
+\Fnquantnn[1]{a} - negated quantifier with twice negated content
+\Fnnquantn[1]{a} - twice negated quantifier with negated content
+\Fnnquantnn[1]{a} - twice negated quantifier with twice negated content
+\Faquant[1]{a} - asserted content stroke with quantifier
+\Fanquant[1]{a} - asserted negated quantifier
+\Fannquant[1]{a} - asserted twice negated quantifier
+\Faquantn[1]{a} - asserted quantifier with negated content
+\Faquantnn[1]{a} - asserted quantifier with twice negated content
+\Fanquantn[1]{a} - asserted negated quantifier with negated content
+\Fanquantnn[1]{a} - asserted negated quantifier with twice negated content
+\Fannquantn[1]{a} - asserted twice negated quantifier with negated content
+\Fannquantnn[1]{a} - asserted twice negated quantifier with twice negated content
+
+while this may look like a daunting list think of it as just two commands:
+\Fcontent[1] - generates a content stroke
+\Fquant[1]{a} - generates a quantifier with variable a
+
+Adding an "a" after the "\F" adds an assertion stroke to the front of the command,
+this may be followed by one two or no "n" to add one two or no negations to the
+stroke. Next comes the name of the command either "content" or "quant". "quant" may
+then be followed by another one two or no "n" which will add one two or no negations
+after the quantifier to it's content stroke. All commands may be used in either text
+or math mode. All the above commands produce output of the same length and may be
+arbitrarly combined to produce longer composite formulas. Since version 1.1 each of
+the basic strokes also has an optional argument with default value one, that scales
+the total length of the stroke (\Fbaselength), so that an optional argument of [.5]
+will produce a stroke half as long. Warning: setting a length shorter than what is
+needed to fit all the options of a stroke leads to negative lengths and hence
+unpredictable results.
+
+Since version 1.3 it is also possible to call all the above commands without the
+word "content" for the content strokes and with just "q" instead of the word "quant"
+for the quantifiers.
+
+frege.sty defines the following more complex commands:
+\Fconditional[<option>]{<consequent>}{<antecedent>}
+\Fbox{<begriffsschrift formula with at least one conditional>}
+\Fbracket{<begriffsschrift formula with at least one conditional>}
+\Fargument[]{}{}{<conclusion>}
+\Fstrut[1]
+
+The final two have been added in version 1.2.
+
+The following shorthands for the above commands have been introduced in version 1.3:
+\Fcdt, \Fb, \Fbb, \Farg, \Fs;
+
+The "Fconditional" command requires a mixture of the commands defined by frege.sty
+and normal mathmode input to produce begriffsschrift. A implies B would be written
+like this:
+
+\Fconditional[\Facontent]{\Fcontent B}{\Fcontent A}
+
+This produces the two dimensional fregean conditional symbol with B lined up above
+A. In addition the "Fconditional" command may be arbitrarily nested to produce any
+begriffsschrift formula possible. All begriffsschrift symbol can be made without
+the use of the optional argument, it exists only for convenience.
+
+"Fbracket" is just the same as "\left(\Fbox\right)" everything said about "Fbox"
+applies equally to "Fbracket". A completed formula of begriffsschrift that includes
+at least one conditional, should always be placed in an "Fbox" this ensures it is
+given enough space in the output behaves correctly with respect to the text around
+it and works correctly within environments such as align*.
+
+"Fargument" arranges two begriffsschrift formulas above each other and seperates
+them from a third by a horizontal line. The option is for the name of a premise
+written elsewhere and will outout (name): to the left of the horizontal line.
+
+"Fstrut" is like a invisible content stroke. Like all other basic strokes, it may be
+scaled using it's optional argument. Fstrut is to be used in conjunction with
+Fargument to ensure the formulas line up properly.
+
+The final result may also be modified by changing the following lengths using the
+\setlength{<lengthname>}{<value>} command. The lengths and there default values are
+given as follows:
+
+length: default value: description:
+\Fbaselength 20pt the length of a single basic stroke
+\Flinewidth 0.5pt the width of all lines other than the assert stroke
+\Fspace 2pt seperation between begriffsschrift and text/formula
+\Fassertwidth 3\Flinewidth the width of the assert stroke
+\Fraiseheight 1ex-\Flinewidth the height of content strokes above the baseline
+\Fnegsep 3\Flinewidth the sepparation between a double negation
+\Fnegshort 2\Flinewidth the space between negation stroke and baseline
+\Fquantwidth 6pt width of the semi circular quantifier depression
+
+Since version 1.3 it is possible to load this package using the "bguq" option:
+\usepackage[bguq]{frege}
+
+if the bguq option is enabled all quantifiers will use the bguq character provided
+by the bguq package by J.J. Green rather than the qbezier used by this package.
+This means the bguq package must be installed to use the option. (It can be found
+on ctan: http://www.ctan.org/pkg/bguq).
+Warning: as it stands the bguq character scales with font while the rest of the
+symbols provided by this package do not. Also, the bguq character will not respond
+to a change in Flinewidth.
+
+For more examples and info see accompanying manual (frege.pdf or frege.tex)
+Everything released under GNU General Public License.
Files old/doc/latex/frege/frege.pdf and new/doc/latex/frege/frege.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/frege/frege.tex new/doc/latex/frege/frege.tex
--- old/doc/latex/frege/frege.tex 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/doc/latex/frege/frege.tex 2012-08-16 01:11:17.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,418 @@
+\documentclass[12pt]{article}
+\usepackage[bguq]{frege}
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+
+%% For condensed itemize:
+\newcommand{\squishlist}{
+ \begin{list}{$\bullet$}{
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}
+ \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}
+ \setlength{\topsep}{0pt}
+ \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{1em}
+ \setlength{\labelwidth}{1em}
+ \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}
+ \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}
+ \setlength{\rightmargin}{0pt}
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{0.5em}}}
+\newcommand{\squishlistend}{\end{list}}
+
+\title{frege.sty \\ A \LaTeXe Package for Typesetting Begriffsschrift}
+\author{Quirin Pamp \\ \texttt{Quirin.Pamp.2009@my.bristol.ac.uk}}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\section{Background}
+\subsection{Motivation for this Package}
+ I recently decided to read Frege's \emph{Begriffsschrift} from 1879 and found that
+ the only copy I could find online was a rather poor quality scan of the original.
+ Since the copyright on german publications expires some 70 or so years after the
+ death of their author, I had the bright idea to combine reading the paper with
+ the making of an electronic copy. This required the typesetting of begriffsschrift.
+ A quick search on the internet assured me that there was a LaTeX package for just
+ this purpose, and off I went. However I quickly noticed that it would be very
+ difficult to achieve a typesetting I deemed sufficiently close to the original
+ using only the package \emph{begriff} by Josh Parsons. Despite the fact that I
+ have never written a LaTeX package before, a quick look at the source file (only
+ some 300 or so lines with plenty of comments) along with some head scratching
+ convinced me to embark on this further project.
+
+ With the help of the begriff package and the good people on Stack-Exchange, I
+ eventually produced a package that was able to do everything that the original
+ begriff package can, albeit with a few changes I consider an improvement. Further
+ versions largely reflect additional features I added as I continue to type up
+ Frege's original paper, as well as bug fixes and input by members of the LaTeX
+ community. Once I am done I will add the tex file for Fege's paper as the
+ definitive example for the usage of this package.
+
+\subsection{The \emph{begriff} Package}
+ This package is based on begriff.sty released under the GNU General Public
+ License.
+ Copyright (C) 2003 by Josh Parsons (josh@coombs.anu.edu.au) with changes made in
+ October 2004 by Richard Heck (heck@fas.harvard.edu) and minor changes by Josh
+ Parsons to fix a problem with linespacing made in May 2005.
+
+ While I could not have done so without the aforementioned work, I have reworked the
+ package from the ground up, to the point where some of the underlying approaches
+ have changed. On the downside this means there is no simple way of converting
+ anything typeset using begriff.sty to use this package instead. I felt this was
+ necessary to achieve an end result I was happy with.
+
+\subsection{The \emph{bguq} Package}
+ Since version 1.3 I added the option to use the bguq character for all
+ quantifiers. This character is provided by the bguq package by J.J. Green.
+
+\section{Version History}
+\subsection{Changes as Compared to begriff.sty}
+ \squishlist
+ \item correct (closer to the original typesetting) relative lengths of the
+ content stroke with respect to other strokes attached to it;
+ \item content strokes point at the middle of the following symbols, rather
+ than the bottom;
+ \item greater width for the assertion stroke as compared to the content stroke;
+ \item a more intuitive structure for the conditional (arguments are now given in
+ the same order as they appear on the left of a completed formula);
+ \item the command for the conditional with empty arguments now results in a
+ vertical line (conditional stroke) on it's own the other strokes are added as
+ the arguments;
+ \item the linewidth is properly accounted for so that things remain properly
+ centered when scaled;
+ \squishlistend
+
+\subsection{Changes in Version 1.1}
+ \squishlist
+ \item added an optional scale factor to all basic strokes;
+ \item simplified the code for Fbracket in terms of that for Fbox;
+ \item rearranged the code in the style file in a more logical way;
+ \squishlistend
+
+\subsection{Changes in Version 1.2}
+ \squishlist
+ \item added a new command ``Fargument'' for typesetting arguments;
+ \item added a new command ``Fstrut'' to be used in conjunction with Fargument;
+ \item changed Fbaselength to be equal to the full length of a basic stroke (20pt);
+ \item fixed a bug where the scale factor introduced in version 1.1 does not reset
+ after all uses;
+ \squishlistend
+
+\subsection{Changes in Version 1.3}
+ \squishlist
+ \item made the ``():'' used in the Fargument command introduced in version 1.2
+ user defined so as to make the option properly optional;
+ \item added a strut to Fargument so as to produce visually correct centering;
+ \item added optional shorthands for all commands for a better flow of usage;
+ \item added the option ``bguq'' to the package which uses the bguq font by J.J.
+ Green for all quantifiers;
+ \squishlistend
+
+\subsection{Changes and Features yet to come}
+ \squishlist
+ \item a way to display nested arguments;
+ \item the fregean conjunction (it exists);
+ \item a vertical shorthand stroke such as used by Frege for typesetting arguments
+ in his original paper;
+ \item scaling symbols automatically with changes in font size;
+ \item scaling of the bguq character with changes in Flinewidth;
+ \squishlistend
+
+\section{Features and Usage}
+\subsection{Commands}
+\subsubsection{Basic Commands}
+ The following is a list of the basic commands provided by this package along with
+ accompanying output and the optional shorthand for the command.
+ \begin{flalign*}
+ &\mbox{Command:} & &\mbox{Output:} & &\mbox{Shorthand:}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fcontent[1]} & &\Fcontent
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash F[1]}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fncontent[1]} & &\Fncontent
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fn[1]}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fnncontent[1]} & &\Fnncontent
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fnn[1]}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Facontent[1]} & &\Facontent
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fa[1]}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fancontent[1]} & &\Fancontent
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fan[1]}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fanncontent[1]} & &\Fanncontent
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fann[1]}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fquant[1]\{a\}} & &\Fquant{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fq[1]}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fnquant[1]\{a\}} & &\Fnquant{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fnq[1]\{a\}}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fnnquant[1]\{a\}} & &\Fnnquant{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fnnq[1]\{a\}}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fquantn[1]\{a\}} & &\Fquantn{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fqn[1]\{a\}}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fquantnn[1]\{a\}} & &\Fquantnn{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fqnn[1]\{a\}}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fnquantn[1]\{a\}} & &\Fnquantn{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fnqn[1]\{a\}}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fnquantnn[1]\{a\}} & &\Fnquantnn{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fnqnn[1]\{a\}}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fnnquantn[1]\{a\}} & &\Fnnquantn{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fnnqn[1]\{a\}}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fnnquantnn[1]\{a\}} & &\Fnnquantnn{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fnnqnn[1]\{a\}}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Faquant[1]\{a\}} & &\Faquant{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Faq[1]\{a\}}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fanquant[1]\{a\}} & &\Fanquant{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fanq[1]\{a\}}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fannquant[1]\{a\}} & &\Fannquant{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fannq[1]\{a\}}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Faquantn[1]\{a\}} & &\Faquantn{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Faqn[1]\{a\}}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Faquantnn[1]\{a\}} & &\Faquantnn{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Faqnn[1]\{a\}}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fanquantn[1]\{a\}} & &\Fanquantn{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fanqn[1]\{a\}}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fanquantnn[1]\{a\}} & &\Fanquantnn{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fanqnn[1]\{a\}}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fannquantn[1]\{a\}} & &\Fannquantn{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fannqn[1]\{a\}}\\
+ &\mbox{\textbackslash Fannquantnn[1]\{a\}} & &\Fannquantnn{a}
+ & &\mbox{\textbackslash Fannqnn[1]\{a\}}\\
+ \end{flalign*}
+ This may seem like a daunting list, but there is an exceedingly simple way to think
+ about it. In a sense there are only two commands \textbackslash Fcontent[1] and
+ \textbackslash Fquant[1]\{\}. These two commands can be augmented with a
+ combination of as and ns so as to add assertion and negation strokes respectively.
+ Any stroke that is asserted (has a fat vertical line at the start) starts with
+ `\textbackslash Fa'. This may be followed by either one or two or no `n' to add one
+ or two or no negation strokes (the small vertical lines below the content
+ stroke). Next comes the name of the main command, either `quant' or `content'.
+ Finally the quantifiers may be followed by either one or two `n' to add one or two
+ negation strokes to the content stroke after the quantifier's depression.
+
+ Consider also that many of these commands are only really present for completeness
+ sake. It is difficult to imagine a situation where a twice negated quantifier with
+ twice negated content would ever be needed.
+
+ Since version 1.1 all basic strokes also have an optional scaling factor. A command
+ followed by [.5], for example would produce a stroke exactly half the default
+ length while [2] produces a stroke twice the default length. (The default length
+ is given by \textbackslash Fbaselength which is set to 20pt. Scaling allows for
+ greater control in the total length of formula as well as for a shorter syntax.
+ (We can replace expressions like \textbackslash Facontent \textbackslash Fcontent
+ with \textbackslash Facontent[2].) Care must be taken not to set a length that is
+ shorter than what is needed to fit all the parts of some basic stroke. This will
+ lead to negative lengths and hence unpredictable output.
+
+ All quantifiers also have a mandatory argument that specifies the variable
+ associated with the quantifier. (Mandatory arguments are contained in a set of
+ curly brackets \{ and \}). This argument should be a single small letter and
+ will be typeset above the semi circular depression in the assertion stroke in
+ mathfrak font which is provided by tha amssymb package. This font can be used in
+ maths mode by using the command `\textbackslash mathfrak\{\}'. Note that all the
+ commands provided by this package may be used in both math and text mode. (Though
+ math mode usually results in better formatting.)
+
+ Finally one may combine the above commands in arbitrary combinations which will
+ result in gapless longer strokes. (Eg.: $\Faquant[0.6]{a}\Fnquantn[1.4]{b}A$)
+ which may be roughly translated into english as ``for all $\mathfrak{a}$ there
+ exists a $\mathfrak{b}$ such that $A$''. (The commands I used for this expression
+ are \$\textbackslash Faquant\{a\}\textbackslash Fnquantn\{b\}A\$).
+
+\subsubsection{Conditional}
+ The conditional is the most important command in this package since it gives
+ Frege's Begriffsschrift it's two dimensional structure.\\
+ The syntax for the Fconditional command is as follows:
+
+ \textbackslash Fconditional[\textless option\textgreater]
+ \{\textless consequent\textgreater\}\{\textless antecedent\textgreater\}\\
+ The shorthand version (since version 1.3) is given by ``\textbackslash Fcdt''.
+
+ The arguments may in principle be anything, but you will only get a begriffschrift
+ formula if the arguments are themselves given by appropriate commands from the list
+ of basic commands given earlier. As an example, an asserted conjunction between $A$
+ and $B$ would be given as follows:
+
+ \$\textbackslash Fconditional[\textbackslash Fancontent]\{\textbackslash Fncontent
+ A\}\{\textbackslash Fcontent B\}\$ \\
+ and produce the following output:
+ \begin{align*}
+ \Fbox{\Fconditional[\Fancontent]{\Fncontent A}{\Fcontent B}}
+ \end{align*}
+ In addition Fconditional may be nested as it's own argument to arbitrary depth.
+ Nesting in the option is not recommended. \\
+ A conditional with nested consequent may be given as follows:
+
+ \$\textbackslash Fconditional[\textbackslash Facontent]\{\textbackslash
+ Fcontent\textbackslash Fconditional\{\textbackslash Fcontent A\}\{\textbackslash
+ Fcontent B\}\}\{\textbackslash Fcontent\textbackslash Fcontent C\}\$\\
+ and produces the following output:
+ \begin{align*}
+ \Fbox{\Fconditional[\Facontent]{\Fcontent\Fconditional{\Fcontent A}
+ {\Fcontent B}}{\Fcontent[2] C}}
+ \end{align*}
+ A conditional with nested antecedent may be given as follows:
+
+ \$\textbackslash Fconditional[\textbackslash Facontent]\{\textbackslash Fcontent
+ \textbackslash Fcontent A\}\{\textbackslash Fcontent\textbackslash Fconditional
+ \{\textbackslash Fcontent B\}\{\textbackslash Fcontent C\}\}\$\\
+ and produces the following output:
+ \begin{align*}
+ \Fbox{\Fconditional[\Facontent]{\Fcontent[2] A}{\Fcontent\Fconditional%
+ {\Fcontent B}{\Fcontent C}}}
+ \end{align*}
+ Each section of a content stroke may thus be replaced with any of the strokes given
+ by the list of basic commands. Note that it is up to the user to place the
+ appropriate number of strokes in each argument to ensure that the content strokes
+ all line up on the right hand side.
+
+\subsubsection{Brackets and Boxes}
+ There are two more commands to be considered:
+
+ \textbackslash Fbox\{\textless complex expression\textgreater\}\\
+ The shorthand version (since version 1.3) is given by \textbackslash Fb\{\}
+
+ \textbackslash Fbracket\{\textless complex expression\textgreater\}\\
+ The shorthand version (since version 1.3) is given by \textbackslash Fbb\{\}
+
+ Both Fbox and Fbracket take what I have called a `complex expression' for their
+ argument. A `complex expression' is any formula in begriffsschrift that has at
+ least one conditional in it. It is generally a good idea to put all complex
+ expressions into either a Fbox or a Fbracket. It is never necessary to place a
+ complex expressions into both an Fbox and an Fbracket since an Fbox simply is a
+ Fbracket without the actual brackets. Fbracket exists only for convenience with
+ the same effect being achieved by \textbackslash left(\textbackslash Fbox\{\}
+ \textbackslash right).
+
+ The reason why the Fbox is a good idea, is that the baseline is very near the top of
+ a complex expression of Begriffsschrift, which can make for some odd formatting
+ effects. In addition to placing the baseline at the middle of a complex expression
+ an Fbox ensures the expression is treated by LaTeX as a single object and given
+ enough space.
+
+ Finally a complex expression may not format correctly in some environments (like
+ the align* environment for example) unless it is placed in an Fbox. In short,
+ always use an Fbox (or Fbracket).
+
+\subsubsection{Arguments and Struts}
+ Since version 1.2 two commands have been added that allow for the typesetting of
+ arguments. The syntax for the argument command is as follows:
+
+ \textbackslash Fargument[\textless premise 0\textgreater]\{\textless premise
+ 1\textgreater\}\{\textless premise 2\textgreater\}\{\textless conclusion
+ \textgreater\}\\
+ The shorthand version (since version 1.3) is given by \textbackslash Farg
+
+ In the following esample the optional argument for premise 0 (an absent premise
+ takes the value `$(X):$' the premises are the two formulas above the therfore line
+ and the conclusion is the formula below the therefore line. The Begriffschrift
+ expressions in the arguments of the Fargument command do not need to be placed in
+ an Fbox, since the Fargument command works by boxing it's arguments allready.
+ \begin{align*}
+ \Fargument[(X):]
+ {\Fconditional[\Facontent]
+ {\Fcontent[2] A}
+ {\Fcontent\Fconditional{\Fcontent B}{\Fcontent C}}}
+ {\Fstrut[2]\Facontent C}
+ {\Fstrut[2]\Facontent A}
+ \end{align*}
+ where $X=\Facontent B$; (this is typeset seperately from the Fargument command);
+
+ The three begriffsschrift formulas above are in fact aligned leftbound. To make
+ them appear rightbound no matter what the relative lengths of $A$, $B$, and $C$,
+ the command ``Fstrut'' has been used in front of $\Facontent C$ and $\Facontent A$.
+ The command ``\textbackslash Fstrut[1]'' works exactly like an invisible content
+ stroke, that is it inserts space of length Fbaselength. Like all basic strokes it
+ can be scaled via an optional scale factor. Since version 1.3 it may be called by
+ the optional shorthand ``\textbackslash Fs''
+
+\subsection{Lengths}
+ In theory all the dimensions in this package can be changed with the command
+ \textbackslash setlength\{\textless name of length\textgreater\}\{\textless new
+ value\textgreater\}, though I have not done a great deal of testing and recommend
+ sticking to the default values. The following then is a table of all lengths: \\
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|}
+ \hline
+ name & default value & description \\
+ \hline
+ \textbackslash Fbaselength & 20pt & the length of the basic strokes \\
+ \textbackslash Flinewidth & 0.5pt & the line width \\
+ \textbackslash Fspace & 2pt & seperation between lines and text/formula \\
+ \textbackslash Fassertwidth & 3\textbackslash Flinewidth & width of assert
+ stroke \\
+ \textbackslash Fraiseheight & 1ex-\textbackslash Flinewidth & height of content
+ lines above baseline \\
+ \textbackslash Fnegsep & 3\textbackslash Flinewidth & seperation between a
+ double negation \\
+ \textbackslash Fnegshort & 2\textbackslash Flinewidth & space between negation
+ stroke and baseline \\
+ \textbackslash Fquantwidth & 6pt & width of the semi-circular quantifier
+ depression \\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+ the height of the conditional stroke is determined by the size of the contents of
+ the conditionals argument, as well as the baselineskip of the surrounding text. It
+ cannot be changed manually.
+
+\subsection{The \emph{bguq} Option}
+ Since version 1.3 this package may be called with the option ``bguq'' as follows: \\
+ \textbackslash usepackage[bguq]\{frege\}\\
+ If the option is enabled all quantifiers will be typeset using the bguq font
+ provided by the bguq package by J.J. Green. (This document is typeset using the
+ option). This means that the bguq package must be installed if the option is
+ enabled. (It can be found on ctan).
+
+ Warning: At present the bguq character scales with font size while the rest of the
+ symbols provided by this package do not. Also the bguq character does not respond
+ to a change in Flinewidth.
+
+\subsection{Final Example}
+ The Geach-Kaplan sentance (with thanks to Marcus Rossberg):
+ \begin{align*}
+ \Fbox%
+ {%
+ \Fconditional[{\Facontent[.2]\Fnquant{F}\Fcontent[.2]}]%
+ {%
+ \Fcontent%
+ \Fconditional%
+ {%
+ \Fcontent[3]%
+ \Fbox%
+ {%
+ f\Fbracket%
+ {%
+ \Fconditional[\Faquant{a}]%
+ {\Fcontent C\mathfrak{(a)}}%
+ {\Fcontent \mathfrak{F(a)}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ {\Fcontent\Fnquantn{b}\Fcontent\mathfrak{F(b)}}%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \Fcontent[0.4]%
+ \Fquant[0.6]{c}%
+ \Fquant[0.6]{d}%
+ \Fcontent[0.4]%
+ \Fconditional%
+ {%
+ \Fncontent%
+ \Fconditional{\Fcontent\mathfrak{c=d}}{\Fcontent\mathfrak{F(d)}}%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \Fncontent%
+ \Fconditional{\Fncontent\mathfrak{F(c)}}{\Fcontent A\mathfrak{(c,d)}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \end{align*}
+ And that is all. \\
+ For comments, suggestions, identified errors, email me at \\
+ \textless Q.Pamp.2009@my.bristol.ac.uk\textgreater.
+\end{document}
+
+\section{GNU General Public License}
+ This package and all accompanying documentation is released under the GNU General
+ Public License. It is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
+ the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+ WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
+ PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this
+ program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place -
+ Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111, USA. (Or just search for it online.)
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/doc/latex/ifmtarg/README new/doc/latex/ifmtarg/README
--- old/doc/latex/ifmtarg/README 2010-07-11 03:03:38.000000000 +0200
+++ new/doc/latex/ifmtarg/README 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-
-The IFMTARG package
-===================
-
-Provides a command for the LaTeX programmer for testing
-whether an argument is empty.
-
-
-INSTALLATION
-------------
-
-Run `pdflatex` on ifmtarg.tex to produce the files
- ifmtarg.ins and ifmtarg.sty,
-as well as to compile the PDF documentation.
-
-Execute `tex ifmtarg.ins` to produce the files above
-except ifmtarg.ins itself (and the PDF file, obviously).
-
-
-COPYRIGHT AND LICENSING
------------------------
-
-Authors: Donald Arseneau and Peter Wilson (Herries Press)
-Maintainer: Will Robertson (will dot robertson at latex-project dot org)
-Copyright 1996 Peter Wilson
-Copyright 2000 Peter Wilson and Donald Arseneau
-
-This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
-version 1.3c of this license or (at your option) any
-later version: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Will Robertson.
-
-This work consists of the files ifmtarg.tex and the
-derived files ifmtarg.sty and ifmtarg.ins.
-
-
-MAINTENANCE
------------
-
-Please report bugs or request features:
- http://github.com/wspr/herries-press/issues
-
-Developmental and historical versions:
- http://github.com/wspr/herries-press
-
-Current release version:
- http://ctan.tug.org/pkg/ifmtarg
-
Files old/doc/latex/ifmtarg/ifmtarg.pdf and new/doc/latex/ifmtarg/ifmtarg.pdf differ
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/frege.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/frege.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/frege.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/frege.doc.tlpobj 2012-08-16 04:44:32.000000000 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+name frege.doc
+category Package
+revision 27417
+shortdesc doc files of frege
+relocated 1
+docfiles size=48
+ RELOC/doc/latex/frege/GNU.txt
+ RELOC/doc/latex/frege/INSTALL
+ RELOC/doc/latex/frege/README
+ RELOC/doc/latex/frege/frege.pdf
+ RELOC/doc/latex/frege/frege.tex
diff -urN '--exclude=CVS' '--exclude=.cvsignore' '--exclude=.svn' '--exclude=.svnignore' old/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifmtarg.doc.tlpobj new/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifmtarg.doc.tlpobj
--- old/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifmtarg.doc.tlpobj 2010-07-11 04:01:09.000000000 +0200
+++ new/tlpkg/tlpobj/ifmtarg.doc.tlpobj 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-name ifmtarg.doc
-category Package
-revision 19363
-shortdesc doc files of ifmtarg
-relocated 1
-docfiles size=43
- RELOC/doc/latex/ifmtarg/README
- RELOC/doc/latex/ifmtarg/ifmtarg.pdf
++++++ ifmtarg.doc.tar.xz -> frege.tar.xz ++++++
++++ 2002 lines of diff (skipped)